Q1 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)
Direct on line starting for large induction motors such as those for bow thruster units, may not be viable.
(a) State the reasons for this. (4)
(b) Sketch a starting system that may be used for such motors. (8)
(c) Describe the starting method sketched in Q. 1(b) (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- High starting current: on DOL starting the motor draws a starting (locked rotor) current of 5 to 8 times full-load current. For a large motor this can be several thousand amperes.
- Voltage dip: this large inrush current causes a heavy voltage drop in the generator and cable impedance. The busbar voltage may fall below the acceptable limit (typically not below 85 to 90% of rated), which can cause contactors to drop out, other motors to stall, and sensitive electronic equipment to malfunction.
- Generator overload: the sudden load may exceed the capacity of the running generators, causing the prime mover to slow, frequency to fall, and possibly the overload protection to trip the generator.
- Mechanical shock: DOL starting applies full torque suddenly, causing high mechanical stress on the motor shaft, coupling, gearbox and the thruster unit, and can cause excessive wear.
- Thermal stress: the high starting current produces high I squared R heating in the windings; frequent DOL starts can overheat the motor.
- Starting torque may be too high for the driven load, causing damage to the propeller or thrust unit.
- The supply system (cables, switchgear, fuses) must be rated for the starting current, which is uneconomic for a large motor.
- A main contactor (line contactor) connecting the supply to the motor.
- A star contactor which connects the three motor phase windings in star during starting.
- A delta contactor which connects the windings in delta for running.
- A timer (time delay relay) which changes over from star to delta after the motor has accelerated.
- Overload relay, fuses or MCCB, start and stop push buttons, and an indicating lamp.
- The motor has six terminals (U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2) brought out to the starter.
- During starting the star contactor closes so each winding receives line voltage divided by root 3 (phase voltage = line/1.732), reducing starting current to about one third of the DOL value. After a set time the star contactor opens and the delta contactor closes, reconnecting the windings in delta so full line voltage is applied for running.
- On pressing start, the line and star contactors close. The motor windings are connected in star, so each phase winding is subjected to phase voltage (line voltage / root 3). The starting current is therefore reduced to approximately one third of the DOL starting current, and the starting torque is reduced to about one third of the DOL torque.
- The motor accelerates under reduced voltage. After a preset time (set by the timer, typically a few seconds, allowing the motor to reach near rated speed), the star contactor opens and the delta contactor closes.
- The windings are now connected in delta, so each winding receives full line voltage and the motor runs at its normal rated condition.
- The changeover is timed so that the motor has accelerated sufficiently to avoid a large current surge when delta is applied. The overload relay protects the motor against sustained overload, and the timer prevents too early or too late a changeover.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)
(a) Sketch a basic circuit showing a d.c., winch motor driven by a Ward Leonard circuit powered by a single speed squirrel cage motor. (8)
(b) Explain how reversal of the winch motor is achieved using the Ward Leonard system. (4)
(c) State advantage and disadvantage of the Ward Leonard drive system. (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A single-speed three-phase squirrel-cage induction motor (the drive motor) is connected to the three-phase supply and mechanically coupled to a d.c. generator.
- The d.c. generator armature is connected directly to the armature of the d.c. winch motor (the two armatures are connected in series, forming a closed loop).
- The field winding of the d.c. generator is supplied from a d.c. exciter (or from a controlled rectifier) through a field rheostat / reversing switch.
- The field winding of the d.c. winch motor is separately excited from the same d.c. source (constant field).
- The induction motor runs continuously at constant speed, driving the d.c. generator. By controlling the generator field current, the generator e.m.f. and hence the voltage applied to the winch motor armature is varied, giving smooth speed control of the winch motor from zero to full speed in either direction.
- The circuit: 3-phase supply -> squirrel cage motor -> d.c. generator (armature) -> d.c. winch motor (armature) -> back to generator. Generator field circuit with reversing switch; motor field circuit separately excited.
- The direction of rotation of a d.c. motor depends on the relative direction of the armature current and the field flux. In the Ward Leonard system the winch motor field is kept constant, so reversal is achieved by reversing the direction of the armature current.
- This is done by reversing the polarity of the generator field current using a reversing switch (or by reversing the generator field connections). Reversing the generator field reverses the polarity of the generated e.m.f., which reverses the direction of current in the armature loop, and hence reverses the direction of rotation of the winch motor.
- Because the generator field is a low-power circuit, reversal is easy and can be done smoothly. The motor can also be brought to rest and reversed by reducing the generator field to zero and then building it up in the opposite direction, giving smooth, controlled reversal without large current surges.
- Very smooth, stepless speed control from zero to full speed in both directions.
- Excellent speed regulation and high torque at low speed, ideal for winches and windlasses.
- Easy reversal with low-power control circuits.
- Regenerative braking is possible (the motor can act as a generator and return power to the system).
- High starting torque with controlled current.
Disadvantages:
- Low overall efficiency because power is converted three times (electrical to mechanical in the drive motor, mechanical to electrical in the generator, electrical to mechanical in the winch motor).
- High initial cost and large physical size (three machines plus exciter).
- Requires more maintenance (commutators and brushes on two d.c. machines).
- The drive motor runs continuously even when the winch is idle, wasting power.
- Slow response compared to modern thyristor/static drives.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
(a) Draw a circuit diagram of a transistor connected as a common emitter amplifier including bias resistors, coupling and decoupling capacitors. (10)
(b) Explain the operation of the circuit components. (6)
Appeared In: Aug 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A single NPN transistor (or PNP) with the emitter common to input and output.
- Bias resistors: R1 and R2 form a potential divider across the supply (Vcc) to set the base voltage and hence the quiescent operating point. Rc is the collector load resistor, Re is the emitter resistor (with a decoupling capacitor Ce across it) for d.c. stabilisation.
- Coupling capacitors: C1 couples the input signal to the base, and C2 couples the amplified output from the collector to the next stage or load. These block d.c. and pass only the a.c. signal.
- Decoupling capacitor: Ce across Re bypasses the a.c. signal to earth so that the a.c. gain is not reduced by negative feedback from Re, while still providing d.c. bias stabilisation.
- Supply: Vcc connected through Rc to the collector; emitter through Re to earth; base biased by R1 (to Vcc) and R2 (to earth).
- Output taken from the collector.
- R1 and R2: potential divider sets the base potential so the transistor operates in the active region (base-emitter junction forward biased, base-collector reverse biased), giving a stable quiescent point.
- Rc (collector load): converts the collector current variation into a voltage variation at the output. The amplified output voltage is developed across Rc.
- Re (emitter resistor): provides d.c. negative feedback for bias stabilisation - if collector current rises, the voltage across Re rises, reducing base-emitter voltage and opposing the rise, stabilising the operating point against temperature and transistor variations.
- Ce (emitter decoupling capacitor): presents a low impedance to the a.c. signal, so the a.c. signal is not attenuated by Re; it restores the full a.c. voltage gain while keeping d.c. stabilisation.
- C1 (input coupling capacitor): blocks the d.c. bias from the signal source and passes only the a.c. input signal to the base.
- C2 (output coupling capacitor): blocks the d.c. collector potential from the load and passes only the amplified a.c. signal.
- The transistor: amplifies the small base current/voltage signal; a small change in base current produces a much larger change in collector current (current gain beta), giving voltage and power amplification. The output at the collector is 180 degrees out of phase with the input.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (6)
(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (i) peak load current, (ii) DC load current, (iii) AC load current. (10)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Forward bias characteristics:
- The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
- A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
- After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.
Reverse bias characteristics:
- When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
- For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.
Breakdown characteristics:
- In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).
Dynamic Resistance (Rd):
- This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Static Resistance (Rs):
- This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to testing High Voltage equipment:
(a) Explain why earthing down is considered essential (3)
(b) Briefly describe the procedures of earthing down (3)
(c) Describe how an insulation resistance test is carried out on High Voltage equipment, making reference to personnel safety. (4)
(d) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a method to detect earth leakage in EACH of the following systems: (6)
(i) earthed
(ii) insulated
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- In this system, the generator star point is connected directly to the ship’s hull.
- Any earth leakage current will therefore complete a circuit back to the generator.
- A Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) is fitted to limit the earth fault current to about 5 Amps.
- This limited current is detected using a Current Transformer (CT), as illustrated in the sketch.
- The CT output is then connected to protection and alarm systems to indicate the fault.
(ii) Insulated Neutral System:
- An instrument is used which injects a DC voltage into the busbars through a resistor (R1) and a diode.
- No earth leakage condition:
- No return path exists, hence no current flows through the circuit.
- Voltage on both sides of R1 remains equal.
- The Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp) detects no potential difference (PD), so the output remains zero.
- Earth leakage condition (resistance Re):
- A return path is created through the ship’s hull.
- Current now flows through R1, causing a voltage drop across it.
- The Op-Amp detects a PD: one terminal sees full voltage while the other sees reduced voltage.
- This imbalance causes the Op-Amp to send a signal to the meter/alarm system.
- The magnitude of earth leakage determines the current flow and the PD across R1, allowing fault severity to be measured.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to electronic control systems:
(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)
(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Temperature Sensor:
- Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.
Transmitter:
- The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).
Comparator:
- The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.
Temperature Controller:
- This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.
Signal Converter:
- This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.
Actuator (or 3-way Valve):
- The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
(a) Derive the expression for current and voltage relations between line and phase values in the star and delta cases. Draw vector diagram. (6)
(b) A balanced delta connected load is connected to a 415V, 50 Hz supply. If the per phase impedance of the load is (8+ j12) ohm, calculate: (10)
(i) the phase current of the load.
(ii) line current
(iii) power consumed by each phase.
Appeared In: Jul 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Star connection:
- The three phase windings have one end of each connected to a common neutral point; the other ends form the three line terminals.
- Line current = phase current: IL = Iph (the same current flows through the winding and the line).
- Line voltage = root 3 x phase voltage: VL = root 3 x Vph. The line voltage is the phasor difference of two phase voltages, which are 120 degrees apart, giving a magnitude of root 3 times the phase voltage.
- Vector diagram: three phase voltages VRN, VYN, VBN at 120 degrees; the line voltage VRY is the phasor sum of VRN and (-VYN), equal to root 3 Vph and leading the phase voltage by 30 degrees.
Delta connection:
- The three windings are connected end to end to form a closed loop, the junctions forming the three line terminals.
- Line voltage = phase voltage: VL = Vph (each winding is directly across two lines).
- Line current = root 3 x phase current: IL = root 3 x Iph. The line current is the phasor difference of two phase currents, giving root 3 times the phase current.
- Vector diagram: three phase currents at 120 degrees; the line current is root 3 times the phase current and lags the phase current by 30 degrees.
- Power in both cases: P = root 3 x VL x IL x cos phi.
- |Z| = sqrt(8^2 + 12^2) = sqrt(64 + 144) = sqrt(208) = 14.42 ohm.
- cos phi = R/|Z| = 8/14.42 = 0.555.
(i) Phase current: in delta, phase voltage = line voltage = 415 V. Iph = Vph/|Z| = 415/14.42 = 28.78 A.
(ii) Line current: IL = root 3 x Iph = 1.732 x 28.78 = 49.85 A.
(iii) Power consumed by each phase: Pph = Iph^2 x R = 28.78^2 x 8 = 828.3 x 8 = 6626 W (6.63 kW).
- Total power = 3 x 6626 = 19.88 kW (also = root 3 x 415 x 49.85 x 0.555 = 19.88 kW).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)
(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.
(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.
The arrangement ensures stable performance with:
- Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
- Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction. (8)
(b) Describe the operation of the generator arrangement sketched in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The a.c. shaft generator is a synchronous machine that produces alternating current with a frequency that is dictated by variations in engine speed. At the full rated r.p.m., the frequency may match with the electrical system.
The output is supplied to the static converter, which has two main parts:
Rectifier bridge -To convert/change shaft generator output from AC to DC.
Inverter - To change DC back to AC, at the correct frequency.
Alternating current from the shaft generator, when delivered to the 3phase rectifier bridge, passes through the diodes in the forward direction only, as a direct current.
The smoothing reactor reduces ripple. The original frequency (within limits) is unimportant once the supply has been altered to d.c. by the rectifier.
The inverter for transposition of the temporary direct current (d.c.) back to alternating current (a.c.) is a bridge made up of 6 thyristors. Direct current available to the thyristors bridge is blocked unless the thyristors are triggered or fired by a gate signal. Gate signals are controlled to switch each thyristor on in sequence to pass a pulse of current. The pattern of alternate current flow and break constitutes an approximation to a 3-phase alternating current.
Voltage and frequency of inverter supply to the a.c. the system must be kept constant within limits. These characteristics are controlled for a normal alternator by the automatic voltage regulator (AVR) and the governor of the prime mover, respectively. They could be controlled by a shaft alternator inverter by a separate diesel-driven synchronous alternator running in parallel. Benefits can be obtained from a synchronous compensator which does not require a prime mover or driving motor except for starting. The compensator may have its own starter motor or it may be an ordinary alternator with a clutch on the drive shaft from the prime mover.
The diesel prime mover for the compensator is started and used to bring it up to speed for connection to the switchboard. The excitation is then set to give the reactive power, and finally, the clutch is opened, the diesel shut down and the synchronous machine then continues to rotate independently like a synchronous motor, at a speed corresponding to the frequency of the a.c. system.
A synchronous compensator is used with the monitoring and controlling system, to dictate or define the frequency. It also maintains constant a.c. system voltage damps any harmonics and meets the reactive power requirements of the system and converter, as well as supplying in the event of a short circuit the current necessary to operate trips.
The cooling arrangements for static frequency converters include the provision of fans as well as the necessary heat sinks for thyristors.
Due to the many advantages of shaft generator systems, more and more vessels are equipped with them
In summary, some of the greatest benefits include the following:
- Lowering of fuel and lubrication costs
- Reduction of maintenance costs and personnel on board
- Return on investment in 2 to 4 years
- Increased safety for ship and crew
- Low noise power generation
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to electronic control systems:
(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)
(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Temperature Sensor:
- Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.
Transmitter:
- The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).
Comparator:
- The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.
Temperature Controller:
- This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.
Signal Converter:
- This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.
Actuator (or 3-way Valve):
- The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a Silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator. (8)
(b) Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system. (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.
The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Sketch a graph of starting current, and torque against the speed of rotation for a single cage motor. (6)
(b) A 230 V motor, which normally develops 10kW at 1000 rev/min with an efficiency of 85%, is to be used as a generator. The armature resistance is 0.15 Ohm and the shunt field resistance is 220 Ohm. If it is driven at 1080 rev/min and the field current is adjusted to 1.1A by means of the shunt regulator what output in kW could be expected as a generator, if the armature copper loss was kept down to that when running as a motor. (10)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting current: at standstill (speed = 0) the starting current is high (5 to 8 times full-load current). As the motor accelerates the current falls, and at synchronous speed it would be zero (in practice small no-load current). The current curve falls from a high value at zero speed to a low value near synchronous speed.
- Torque: at standstill the starting torque is moderate (about 1.5 to 2 times full-load torque). As speed increases the torque rises to a maximum (pull-out torque) at a speed corresponding to the slip for maximum torque, then falls to zero at synchronous speed. The torque-speed curve rises from the starting value, peaks, then drops to zero at synchronous speed.
- The two curves are plotted against speed from 0 to synchronous speed.
- As a motor: input power = 10/0.85 = 11.765 kW. Line current = 11765/230 = 51.15 A.
- Shunt field current (motor) = 230/220 = 1.045 A. Armature current (motor) = 51.15 - 1.045 = 50.1 A.
- Armature copper loss (motor) = Ia^2 Ra = 50.1^2 x 0.15 = 2510 x 0.15 = 376.5 W.
- Back e.m.f. (motor) E = V - Ia Ra = 230 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 230 - 7.5 = 222.5 V.
- As a generator driven at 1080 rev/min with field current 1.1 A:
- E.m.f. is proportional to speed and flux. Flux is proportional to field current (assumed linear). E_g = E_m x (1080/1000) x (1.1/1.045) = 222.5 x 1.08 x 1.0526 = 252.9 V.
- Armature copper loss kept the same as when running as a motor (376.5 W): Ia^2 x 0.15 = 376.5, so Ia = sqrt(376.5/0.15) = sqrt(2510) = 50.1 A.
- Terminal voltage of generator V = E_g - Ia Ra = 252.9 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 252.9 - 7.5 = 245.4 V.
- Load current = Ia - field current = 50.1 - 1.1 = 49.0 A.
- Output power = V x I_load = 245.4 x 49.0 = 12.02 kW.
So the expected generator output is about 12 kW.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct online start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on A.C. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following Problems:
(a) High starting current. (8)
(b) Low starting torque. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)
(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A. (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
- Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
- The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
- The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
- For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
- The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
- The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)
(b) The low-voltage release of an A.C. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohms. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, A.C. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the “full-in” position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the “full-in” position of the plunger. (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)
(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together. Between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.
Specifications of the three batteries are given below: (10)
Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Nov 2024 Jun 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
For a star-connected system:
$$V_{line}=\sqrt3\:V_{phase}$$
$$\frac{V_{line}}{V_{phase}}=\sqrt3\:=\:1.732$$
In a star connection, the line current is equal to the phase current:
$$I_{line}=I_{phase}$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Explain the meaning of the term power factor correction. (4)
(b) State TWO advantages of power factor correction. (4)
(c) Explain, with the aid of a circuit diagram, how power factor correction can be effected in a three phase circuit using capacitors. (4)
(d) Explain ONE method other than the use of capacitors by means of which power factor correction may be effected. (4)
Appeared In: Mar 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Power factor correction refers to the process of improving the power factor of an electrical system to bring it closer to unity (1 or 100%). It involves reducing the phase difference between voltage and current, which is caused by inductive loads like motors, transformers, and fluorescent lighting. These loads consume reactive power, leading to a lagging power factor. By adding components like capacitors, synchronous condensers, or phase advancers, reactive power is compensated, and the power factor is improved.
In practical terms, power factor correction aims to minimize the inefficiencies in the electrical system, reduce energy losses, and ensure optimal utilization of the power supplied by the generator or grid.
- By improving power factor, the current flow in the system is reduced, leading to lower I²R losses in cables, transformers, and other distribution components.
- With a higher power factor, the electrical system operates more efficiently, ensuring better utilization of the generated power.
- Improved power factor reduces the apparent power (kVA) requirement, allowing for smaller-sized generators, transformers, and cables, thus reducing capital costs.
- Higher power factor ensures better voltage stability across the system, preventing voltage drops and protecting sensitive equipment from under-voltage issues.
- By reducing reactive power, the system can handle more active power (real load) within the same capacity of the equipment, maximising output.
- With reduced current and heat generation, the wear and tear on electrical components are minimized, extending their lifespan.
- Higher efficiency in power usage reduces the overall energy demand, lowering fuel consumption and greenhouse gas emissions in power generation.
A three-phase system typically has an inductive load (e.g., motors), causing a lagging power factor. Capacitors can provide leading reactive power to compensate for this. The capacitors are connected in parallel with the inductive load.
- The size (capacitance) of each capacitor is calculated based on the size of the inductive load and the desired power factor improvement. Specialised software or calculation methods are often used for accurate determination.
- The capacitors are connected in a star or delta configuration, matching the load's connection. They should be appropriately rated for the voltage and current of the system.
- The leading reactive power supplied by the capacitors cancels out some of the lagging reactive power from the inductive load, effectively reducing the overall reactive power and improving the power factor.
Besides capacitors, synchronous motors can also be used for power factor correction. Synchronous motors can be operated at leading power factor, effectively counteracting the lagging power factor of inductive loads. These motors can contribute both real power and leading reactive power to the system. However, synchronous motors are more complex and expensive than capacitors. They are often used in larger industrial installations where the power factor correction requirements are significant.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an a.c. generator using a sketch to show how arcing controlled. (6)
(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would require following such event. (5)
(c) Give a safe procedure to follow should a main circuit breaker fail to open under fault condition. (5)
Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.
Main Components:
- Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
- Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
- Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
- Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
- The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
- The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
- In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
- This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).
Checks following the event:
- Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
- Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
- Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
- Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
- Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
- Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
- Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
- After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
- Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
- Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an a.c. generator using a sketch to show how arcing is Controlled.
(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would require following such event
(c) Give a safe procedure to follow should a main circuit breaker fail to open under fault Condition.
Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.
Main Components:
- Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
- Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
- Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
- Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
- The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
- The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
- In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
- This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).
Checks following the event:
- Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
- Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
- Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
- Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
- Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
- Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
- Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
- After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
- Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
- Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) With respect to measuring instruments what is the difference between analogue and digital measuring instruments. Explain the working principle of each type.
(b) Describe with the aid of simple sketches one analogue and one digital measuring instrument you have used onboard.
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles
Analogue Instruments
Definition:
- An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.
Working Principle:
- The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
- In a typical analogue electrical meter:
- The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
- This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
- A spring provides a balancing torque.
- The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).
Digital Instruments
Definition:
- A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).
Working Principle:
- The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
- In a typical digital meter:
- The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
- An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
- A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
- The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.
(b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard
1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
Working Principle:
- The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
- When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
- This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
- Applications Onboard:
- Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
- Advantages:
- Rugged construction and no power requirement.
- Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.
2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter
Working Principle:
- A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
- The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
- The signal is digitised by an ADC.
- The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
- The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
- For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
- Applications Onboard:
- Checking 24V DC control circuits.
- Verifying generator phase voltages.
- Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x
In a.c. generators, voltage dip occurs in two stages.
(a) (i) Sketch a voltage-time graph showing the pattern of voltage dip.
(ii) Referring to this graph, state with reasons the effect on the electrical system of a small power installation when a large load is suddenly switched
(b) Explain EACH of the following categories of voltage control:
(i) Error operated;
(ii) Functional.
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The regulation state that the voltage must recover within 1.5 seconds. However an acceptable recovery time would be 0.5 seconds for a brushless and 0.2 seconds or less for a compounded machine.
(ii) Effect on small power installation:
When a large load is suddenly applied, the electrical system experiences a significant voltage dip. Initially, there is a sharp drop in voltage due to the high inrush current drawn by the load. This is followed by a slower decrease as the alternator's reactance and power factor affect the voltage. During this period, the alternator’s excitation system, AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and prime mover governor work to restore the voltage.
The sudden load causes a drop in power factor, increasing the reactive power demand on the system. If the voltage dip is significant and prolonged, sensitive equipment may malfunction, and other connected loads might experience disruptions. The system's ability to recover depends on the alternator's capacity, excitation response, and governor speed control.
In this method, the output voltage of the bus bar is continuously measured and compared to the normal rated voltage. Any deviation from the desired voltage generates an error signal, which is sent to the excitation system. This error signal adjusts the excitation to regulate the output voltage. For instance, if the voltage drops, the excitation current is increased, and if the voltage rises, the excitation is reduced.
Examples of error-operated voltage control include brushless alternators with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and alternators using a carbon pile AVR and DC exciter.
(ii) Functional Voltage Control:
This type of voltage control is directly based on the instantaneous value of the voltage. If the voltage falls, the excitation is increased proportionally to the amount of voltage drop, and vice versa. Since the excitation is a direct function of the voltage, it is referred to as functional voltage control.
Static excitation systems are an example of functional voltage control. These systems offer faster response times compared to error-operated methods, making them suitable for applications requiring precise and rapid voltage regulation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
In some circumstances electrical current may be induced into the shafting of rotating machinery.
(a) state the problem that may be caused by this current.
(b) explain with the aid of sketches, how currents may be avoided or reduced in the following instances:
(i) d.c. machines
(ii) main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller.
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Electrical currents induced in the shafting of rotating machinery flow through the bearings, journals and the machine frame. As the current passes through the bearing oil film it can cause sparking (electric discharge machining), which pits and scores the bearing surfaces and the journal.
- This leads to rapid bearing wear, overheating, and eventual bearing failure. The pitting (frosting) of the bearing and shaft surfaces is characteristic of shaft currents.
- In d.c. machines, shaft currents can also cause sparking at the commutator and damage to the brushes.
- The currents are caused by magnetic asymmetry in the machine (e.g. unbalanced magnetic pull, eccentric rotor, segmented stator laminations, or a circulating flux linking the shaft) which induces an e.m.f. along the shaft.
(i) d.c. machines:
- The shaft is insulated from the frame at one end by fitting an insulated bearing (a bearing with an insulating layer between the bearing housing and the frame, or an insulated bearing liner). This breaks the circulating current path through the shaft and frame.
- The other bearing is left earthed (metallic) so that any residual current has a defined path and does not pass through the insulated bearing.
- A brush (earthing brush) may be fitted to the shaft to collect and earth any residual shaft current, preventing it from passing through the bearings.
- Ensuring the magnetic circuit is symmetrical and the air gap is uniform reduces the unbalanced magnetic pull that induces shaft currents.
(ii) Main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller:
- The bronze propeller and the steel shaft form a galvanic couple in seawater, and the shaft can carry current due to the propeller earthing effect and any stray currents.
- The shaft is insulated from the propeller (insulating coupling or insulating sleeve between the propeller and the shaft) to break the electrical path.
- An earthing brush (shaft earthing brush) is fitted to the shaft to provide a low-resistance path to earth, so that any current is conducted to earth through the brush rather than through the bearings and stern gland.
- The shaft earthing brush also prevents electrolytic corrosion of the propeller and shaft and reduces the risk of bearing damage from shaft currents.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Explain the significance of the root mean square value of an alternating current or voltage wave form; Define the form factor of such a wave form (6)
(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (10)
(i) peak load current,
(ii) DC load current,
(iii) AC load current
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.
Supply voltage, $$V_{rms} = 110\ V$$
Diode internal resistance, $$R_D = 20\ \Omega$$
Load resistance, $$R_L = 1000\ \Omega$$
The total resistance in the conducting circuit is:
$$R_T = R_D + R_L$$
$$R_T = 20 + 1000 = 1020\ \Omega$$
(i) Peak Load Current
The peak value of the supply voltage is:
$$V_{peak} = \sqrt{2}\,V_{rms}$$
$$V_{peak} = 1.414 \times 110 = 155.56\ V$$
Therefore, the peak load current is:
$$I_{peak} = \frac{V_{peak}}{R_T}$$
$$I_{peak} = \frac{155.56}{1020} = 0.1525\ A$$
Peak load current:
$$I_{peak}\approx0.153\ A=153\ mA$$
(ii) DC Load Current
For a half-wave rectifier, the average or DC value of current is:
$$I_{DC} = \frac{I_{peak}}{\pi}$$
$$I_{DC} = \frac{0.1525}{3.142} = 0.0485\ A$$
DC load current:
$$I_{DC}\approx0.0485\ A=48.5\ mA$$
(iii) AC Load Current
For a half-wave rectified current, the RMS load current is:
$$I_{RMS} = \frac{I_{peak}}{2}$$
$$I_{RMS} = \frac{0.1525}{2} = 0.07625\ A$$
The AC component of the load current is:
$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{I_{RMS}^{2}-I_{DC}^{2}}$$
$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{(0.07625)^2-(0.0485)^2}$$
$$I_{AC} \approx 0.0588\ A$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vra Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)
(b) A d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2Ω. The machine has six poles, and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate: (10)
(i) The speed;
(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier (peak detector) consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). Output taken across the capacitor/load.
- During the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load. If the time constant R x C is large compared with the period, the output is held near Vm.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode and large time constant), i.e. a d.c. voltage close to Vm with small ripple.
- Back e.m.f. E = V - Ia Ra = 480 - 110 x 0.2 = 480 - 22 = 458 V.
- For a lap-connected armature, number of parallel paths A = number of poles P = 6.
- E.m.f. equation: E = (P x Z x phi x N) / (60 x A). Since A = P, E = (Z x phi x N)/60.
- (i) Speed: N = (E x 60)/(Z x phi) = (458 x 60)/(864 x 0.05) = 27480/43.2 = 636.1 rev/min.
- (ii) Gross torque developed: T = (P x Z x phi)/(2 pi A) x Ia = (6 x 864 x 0.05)/(2 x 3.1416 x 6) x 110 = (259.2/37.70) x 110 = 6.876 x 110 = 756.4 N m.
- (Check: armature power = E x Ia = 458 x 110 = 50,380 W; angular speed = 2 pi x 636.1/60 = 66.6 rad/s; T = 50380/66.6 = 756.5 N m.)
So speed = 636 rev/min and gross torque = 756 N m.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
(a) Draw a circuit diagram illustrating how a single thyristor ('silicon controlled rectifier') may be used to provide a variable voltage d.c. output from a single phase a.c. supply.
(b) Explain how the firing angle of the thyristor is varied.
(c) Sketch waveforms for the output voltage when the firing angle is:
(i) 60°;
(ii) 120°.
Appeared In: Jan 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
B)It is phase-angle firing that thyristor controllers commonly adopt to precisely regulate the power of electric heaters.
Phase-angle firing, also known as phase cutting, phase-angle control, or phase-fired control (PFC), is a power-limiting method used for AC voltages. It regulates power by triggering a thyristor, SCR, triac, thyratron, or similar gated device into conduction at a specific phase angle of the AC waveform.
In the heating power controller, the thyristor acts like a switch that controls the on/off state of the heater in the main circuit. As shown in the figure of the APR3H series three-phase power controller, each phase is equipped with one thyristor. During each half AC cycle, the thyristor is triggered into conduction at a certain phase angle between 0 and 180 degrees, and then it naturally turns off at 180 degrees. The earlier the thyristor is triggered within the phase angle, the greater the power the controller delivers to the heater. Zero-crossing means triggering at the zero phase angle, where the thyristor conducts for the entire half cycle.
Waveform with Phase-Angle Control
The output voltage waveform of a thyristor power controller is clipped depending on the firing angle. At higher firing angles, the waveform is clipped more, resulting in a smaller area under the curve and, therefore, less average power delivered to the heater.
Summary
SCR (SCR Power Controller): Ideal for applications requiring precise power and temperature control, such as industrial heating systems. SCR allows for smooth, continuous modulation of power, making it suitable for systems needing fine adjustments.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to a 3 speed A.C. motor driven cargo winch:
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor;
(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed Change:
The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:
$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$
Where,
Ns = Synchronous speed.
f = Frequency of power supply.
P = number of poles.
Methods to Achieve Speed Change:
Multiple Stator Windings:
- Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.
Consequent Pole Method:
- A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.
Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):
- Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.
Braking Mechanism:
Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.
Plugging:
- Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.
Rheostatic Braking:
- In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.
Regenerative Braking:
- For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier, if the supply voltage is v(t) = V Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)
(b) A series circuit comprising a 50Ω resistor, a coil having resistance and inductance and a capacitor is connected across a 50 V variable frequency supply. When the frequency is 400 Hz the current reaches its maximum value of 0.6 A and the voltage across the capacitor is 200 V. Calculate EACH of the following: (10)
(i) the value of the capacitance;
(ii) the resistance and inductance of the coil;
(iii) the power taken from the supply;
(iv) the circuit power factor.
Appeared In: Jan 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Operation and Output Voltage Across Load Resistor
Let the input supply be: v(t)=Vmsin(ωt)
- During the positive half-cycle, the diode conducts whenever v(t) exceeds the voltage across the capacitor. The capacitor charges instantly (ideal case) to the peak value Vm.
- After reaching the peak, the diode becomes reverse biased (since v(t)<Vm), and the capacitor holds its charge.
- The load resistor (R) is connected in parallel with the capacitor; thus, the voltage across Ris the same as across C.
- If we ignore the small discharge of C(assuming R is large and/or C is large so discharge is negligible between cycles):
Voltage Across Load Resistor
The voltage across R after initial peak is: vR(t)≈VmThat is, the output is a DC voltage nearly equal to the peak value of the AC input.
Mathematical Expression
If capacitor discharge is considered negligible: vout(t)=VmIf the discharge is not negligible (realistic case), the output will have slight ripple and can be given by: vout(t)≈Vm−ΔVwhere ΔV is the ripple voltage (depends on R, C, and frequency f).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived (6)
(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.
Battery A 105V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100V, internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them. (10)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
- For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
- Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:
R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:
R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- And the star-to-delta conversion:
R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3
R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1
R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2
- For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
- Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
- Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
- Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.
105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)
- Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)
- At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)
2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)
- From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
- Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500
140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500
2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.
- Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
- Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
- Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
- Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
- Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
- Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.
So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 4x
Differentiate between half and full wave rectification. State where half wave rectification may be used and the purpose for which it is not well adapted. Sketch a bridge connection by which full wave rectification may be obtained. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The difference between half wave and full wave rectification:
Half-wave rectification:
- Uses a single diode to allow only one-half of the AC waveform (either the positive or negative half-cycle) to pass through. The other half is blocked.
- Results in a pulsating DC output with a significant amount of ripple (variation in voltage). The average DC voltage is lower compared to the input AC voltage.
- Simpler to implement, requiring only one diode, but less efficient because it wastes half of the input power.
- The average output current is 0.318 times the peak input current. The RMS value is 0.5 times the peak input current.
Half-wave rectification is not well adopted because:
- Less Average current
- Less average RMS
- High pulsation output
- Lower voltage developed
- More ripple as compared to others
- Efficiency is less as compared to others.
Full-wave rectification:
- Uses either two diodes in a centre-tapped transformer configuration or four diodes in a bridge rectifier configuration to utilize both halves of the AC waveform.
- Produces a pulsating DC output with less ripple than half-wave rectification, resulting in a smoother DC output and a higher average DC voltage.
- More efficient as it uses both halves of the input AC waveform.
- Requires more components (two or four diodes), but provides a more efficient and improved DC output. The average output current is 0.6365 times the peak input current, and the RMS value is 0.707 times the peak input current.
Sketch of bridge connection for full wave rectification:
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three-phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (6)
(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (5)
(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed. (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.
On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.
By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.
In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.
Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x
Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between two of the following types of electronic circuits.
(a) Rectifier circuit (6)
(b) Amplifier circuit (5)
(c) Oscillator circuit (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Rectifier Circuit
- Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
- Input: AC signal.
- Output: DC signal.
- Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
- Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
- Feedback: No feedback involved.
- Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.
The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.
(b) Amplifier Circuit
- Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
- Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
- Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
- Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
- Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
- Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
- Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.
This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.
(c) Oscillator Circuit
- Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
- Input: DC supply.
- Output: AC signal.
- Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
- Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
- Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
- Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Explain the meaning of the term power factor correction.
(b) State TWO advantages of power factor correction.
(c) Explain, with the aid of a circuit diagram, how power factor correction can be effected in a three-phase circuit using capacitors.
(d) Explain ONE method other than the use of capacitors by means of which power factor correction may be effected.
Appeared In: Mar 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Power factor correction refers to the process of improving the power factor of an electrical system to bring it closer to unity (1 or 100%). It involves reducing the phase difference between voltage and current, which is caused by inductive loads like motors, transformers, and fluorescent lighting. These loads consume reactive power, leading to a lagging power factor. By adding components like capacitors, synchronous condensers, or phase advancers, reactive power is compensated, and the power factor is improved.
In practical terms, power factor correction aims to minimize the inefficiencies in the electrical system, reduce energy losses, and ensure optimal utilization of the power supplied by the generator or grid.
- By improving power factor, the current flow in the system is reduced, leading to lower I²R losses in cables, transformers, and other distribution components.
- With a higher power factor, the electrical system operates more efficiently, ensuring better utilization of the generated power.
- Improved power factor reduces the apparent power (kVA) requirement, allowing for smaller-sized generators, transformers, and cables, thus reducing capital costs.
- Higher power factor ensures better voltage stability across the system, preventing voltage drops and protecting sensitive equipment from under-voltage issues.
- By reducing reactive power, the system can handle more active power (real load) within the same capacity of the equipment, maximising output.
- With reduced current and heat generation, the wear and tear on electrical components are minimized, extending their lifespan.
- Higher efficiency in power usage reduces the overall energy demand, lowering fuel consumption and greenhouse gas emissions in power generation.
A three-phase system typically has an inductive load (e.g., motors), causing a lagging power factor. Capacitors can provide leading reactive power to compensate for this. The capacitors are connected in parallel with the inductive load.
- The size (capacitance) of each capacitor is calculated based on the size of the inductive load and the desired power factor improvement. Specialised software or calculation methods are often used for accurate determination.
- The capacitors are connected in a star or delta configuration, matching the load's connection. They should be appropriately rated for the voltage and current of the system.
- The leading reactive power supplied by the capacitors cancels out some of the lagging reactive power from the inductive load, effectively reducing the overall reactive power and improving the power factor.
Besides capacitors, synchronous motors can also be used for power factor correction. Synchronous motors can be operated at leading power factor, effectively counteracting the lagging power factor of inductive loads. These motors can contribute both real power and leading reactive power to the system. However, synchronous motors are more complex and expensive than capacitors. They are often used in larger industrial installations where the power factor correction requirements are significant.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three-phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point.
(b) Explain why for most cases the neutral point is insulated.
(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed.
Appeared In: Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.
On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.
By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.
In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.
Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) (i) Sketch a diagrammatic arrangement of a static or self-excited alternator.
(ii) Describe the operation of the self-excited alternator.
(c) State why the voltage dip is less in the self-excited alternator than in brushless or conventional alternators.
Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Compounded means that the excitation is derived from both the generator’s output voltage and its output current.
- On no-load, excitation to the generator is provided by the PRI.1 winding of the excitation transformer.
- On load, the generator current contributes an additional excitation current via the PRI.2 winding of the transformer. This helps maintain a constant output voltage.
If the excitation components are carefully designed, the output voltage of a compounded generator can be kept virtually constant across all load conditions, without the use of an AVR or manual voltage trimmer.
However, some generator manufacturers include:
- AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and
- Manual trimmer rheostat
even in such compounded static excitation systems. These additions:
- Allow finer voltage regulation over the load range, and
- Enable manual voltage control, useful during synchronising and kVAr load sharing between generators.
A practical three-phase static excitation system typically includes additional components such as:
The circuit shown in the referenced figure contains no AVR or manual trimmer regulator. In such a system, any surge in load current feeds back automatically to adjust the field excitation. This correction happens so rapidly that the output voltage remains practically constant.
Important: Compound excitation systems must have their static components precisely matched to the generator they are designed to operate with.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
With reference to shipboard electrical distribution systems:
(a) describe the meaning of the term earth fault;
(b) explain why an insulated neutral is preferred for low voltage systems;
(c) sketch a circuit diagram of one arrangement for detecting phase to earth faults for a star neutral earthing resistor (NER)
(d) How is the ohmic value of a NER calculated to limit the earth fault current to the full load rating of a three-phase neutral earthed a.c. generator.
Appeared In: Oct 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- An earth fault is an unintentional connection between a live conductor (phase) and the earth (hull, frame, or earthed metalwork). It occurs when insulation fails, a cable is damaged, or moisture enters a terminal box, allowing current to leak from the live conductor to earth.
- In a shipboard system, an earth fault can be a single phase-to-earth fault (which in an insulated system does not immediately cause a large fault current but leaves the system in a dangerous condition) or a more serious fault involving two phases.
- In an insulated (unearthed) neutral system, a single phase-to-earth fault does not cause a large fault current to flow, because there is no direct earth return path. The system can continue to operate, and the fault is indicated by an earth fault alarm so it can be located and cleared at a convenient time.
- This improves continuity of supply, which is important on a ship where loss of power could be dangerous.
- It reduces the risk of electric shock and fire from a single earth fault, and prevents the large fault currents and arcing that would occur in an earthed system.
- It allows the use of earth fault monitoring (insulation monitoring) to detect deterioration of insulation before it becomes a serious fault.
- The generator is star-connected with the neutral connected to earth through a neutral earthing resistor (NER).
- The three phases are connected to the busbars through current transformers.
- An earth fault relay is connected to the residual circuit of the three current transformers (the secondary windings are connected so that the relay sees the vector sum of the three phase currents, which is zero under balanced conditions).
- On a phase-to-earth fault, the fault current flows through the NER to earth and returns through the faulted phase, producing an unbalanced current in the current transformers which operates the earth fault relay.
- Alternatively, a core-balance (zero-sequence) current transformer surrounds the three phase conductors; on an earth fault the unbalanced current induces a signal that operates the relay.
- The relay gives an alarm and/or trips the generator circuit breaker.
- The NER is chosen to limit the earth fault current to the full-load rating of the generator.
- Full-load current of the generator: I_fl = S / (root 3 x V_line), where S is the rated kVA and V_line the line voltage.
- The earth fault current is limited by the NER. For a star-connected generator, the phase-to-earth voltage is V_phase = V_line / root 3.
- The NER resistance R = V_phase / I_fl = (V_line / root 3) / I_fl.
- Substituting I_fl = S/(root 3 V_line): R = (V_line/root 3) / (S/(root 3 V_line)) = V_line^2 / S.
- So the ohmic value of the NER = V_line^2 / S, where V_line is in volts and S in volt-amperes (or V_line^2 in kV and S in kVA gives R in ohms directly: R = (V_line in kV)^2 / (S in MVA) x 1000).
- Example: for a 440 V, 1000 kVA generator, R = 440^2 / 1,000,000 = 0.1936 ohm.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to squirrel cage induction, electric motor:
(a) Describe the construction of such a motor.
(b) Sketch the torque against speed curve of such a motor.
(c) Describe a method employed by a retrofitted device used to improve the part load performance of an induction motor.
Appeared In: Oct 2025 Sep 2023 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Construction of a Squirrel Cage Induction Motor
A squirrel cage induction motor is a robust and reliable AC motor in which the rotor resembles a squirrel cage, giving the motor its name.
Main Components
1. Stator (Stationary Part)
- Composed of a laminated steel core enclosed within a rigid frame.
- The core contains slots that house the three-phase stator windings.
- When connected to a three-phase supply, these windings produce a rotating magnetic field (RMF).
2. Rotor (Rotating Part)
- Constructed from a laminated steel core with aluminium or copper conductor bars placed in longitudinal slots.
- These rotor bars are short-circuited at both ends by end rings, forming a closed “squirrel cage” structure.
- There is no external electrical connection to the rotor.
3. Air Gap
- A small uniform clearance between the stator and the rotor.
- Allows free rotation of the rotor while minimizing magnetic losses.
4. Shaft and Bearings
- The rotor assembly is mounted on a central shaft.
- The shaft is supported by ball or roller bearings for smooth rotation.
5. End Shields and Cooling System
- End shields enclose the motor and support the bearing housings.
- An external or shaft-mounted cooling fan forces air over the motor’s external cooling fins to dissipate heat.
Characteristics
- Simple and rugged construction.
- Low maintenance requirements due to the absence of brushes or slip rings.
- Fixed rotor resistance, giving relatively fixed-speed operating characteristics.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to a 3 speed a.c. cage motor driven cargo winch:
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor;
(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed Change:
The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:
$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$
Where,
Ns = Synchronous speed.
f = Frequency of power supply.
P = number of poles.
Methods to Achieve Speed Change:
Multiple Stator Windings:
- Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.
Consequent Pole Method:
- A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.
Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):
- Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.
Braking Mechanism:
Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.
Plugging:
- Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.
Rheostatic Braking:
- In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.
Regenerative Braking:
- For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)
(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A. (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
- Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
- The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
- The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
- For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
- The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
- The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the related torque.
(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35Ω. When connected to a 220V, 50Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived
(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.
Battery A 105V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100V, internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
- For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
- Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:
R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:
R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- And the star-to-delta conversion:
R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3
R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1
R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2
- For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
- Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
- Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
- Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.
105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)
- Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)
- At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)
2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)
- From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
- Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500
140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500
2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.
- Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
- Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
- Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
- Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
- Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
- Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.
So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x
Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuits.
(a) Rectifier circuit
(b) Amplifier circuit
(c) Oscillator circuit.
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Rectifier Circuit
- Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
- Input: AC signal.
- Output: DC signal.
- Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
- Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
- Feedback: No feedback involved.
- Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.
The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.
(b) Amplifier Circuit
- Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
- Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
- Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
- Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
- Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
- Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
- Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.
This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.
(c) Oscillator Circuit
- Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
- Input: DC supply.
- Output: AC signal.
- Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
- Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
- Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
- Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams.
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.
Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.
For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.
Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.
The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Sketch a magnetic overload device incorporating a dashpot and explain how the current and time settings of the device may be varied.
(b) With the aid of a sketch, outline the essential features of a three stage "preferential tripping" scheme for the main generators of a ship.
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Preferential trips operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.
When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows
First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):
- Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
- Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
- Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load
Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
- Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high
Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
- Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.
Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):
- Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
- This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.
Main Breaker Trip
- If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.
Overload Protection and Alarms
- Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)
(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest. (10)
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
- Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
- Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
- The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
- Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
- Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
- The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
- In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
- Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
- Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
- Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
- Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
- Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:
0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y
0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)
0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x
0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.
- y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
- So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
- Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
- Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
- Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
- (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
- The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.
So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Explain the meaning of the term power factor correction.
(b) State TWO advantages of power factor correction.
(c) Explain, with the aid of a circuit diagram, how power factor correction can be effected in a three phase circuit using capacitors.
(d) Explain one method other than the use of capacitors by means of which power factor correction may be effected.
Appeared In: Mar 2026 Nov 2025 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Power factor correction refers to the process of improving the power factor of an electrical system to bring it closer to unity (1 or 100%). It involves reducing the phase difference between voltage and current, which is caused by inductive loads like motors, transformers, and fluorescent lighting. These loads consume reactive power, leading to a lagging power factor. By adding components like capacitors, synchronous condensers, or phase advancers, reactive power is compensated, and the power factor is improved.
In practical terms, power factor correction aims to minimize the inefficiencies in the electrical system, reduce energy losses, and ensure optimal utilization of the power supplied by the generator or grid.
- By improving power factor, the current flow in the system is reduced, leading to lower I²R losses in cables, transformers, and other distribution components.
- With a higher power factor, the electrical system operates more efficiently, ensuring better utilization of the generated power.
- Improved power factor reduces the apparent power (kVA) requirement, allowing for smaller-sized generators, transformers, and cables, thus reducing capital costs.
- Higher power factor ensures better voltage stability across the system, preventing voltage drops and protecting sensitive equipment from under-voltage issues.
- By reducing reactive power, the system can handle more active power (real load) within the same capacity of the equipment, maximising output.
- With reduced current and heat generation, the wear and tear on electrical components are minimized, extending their lifespan.
- Higher efficiency in power usage reduces the overall energy demand, lowering fuel consumption and greenhouse gas emissions in power generation.
A three-phase system typically has an inductive load (e.g., motors), causing a lagging power factor. Capacitors can provide leading reactive power to compensate for this. The capacitors are connected in parallel with the inductive load.
- The size (capacitance) of each capacitor is calculated based on the size of the inductive load and the desired power factor improvement. Specialised software or calculation methods are often used for accurate determination.
- The capacitors are connected in a star or delta configuration, matching the load's connection. They should be appropriately rated for the voltage and current of the system.
- The leading reactive power supplied by the capacitors cancels out some of the lagging reactive power from the inductive load, effectively reducing the overall reactive power and improving the power factor.
Besides capacitors, synchronous motors can also be used for power factor correction. Synchronous motors can be operated at leading power factor, effectively counteracting the lagging power factor of inductive loads. These motors can contribute both real power and leading reactive power to the system. However, synchronous motors are more complex and expensive than capacitors. They are often used in larger industrial installations where the power factor correction requirements are significant.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three-phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (6)
(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (5)
(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed. (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.
On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.
By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.
In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.
Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) (i) Sketch a diagrammatic arrangement of a static or self-excited alternator. (5)
(ii) Describe the operation of the self-excited alternator. (5)
(b) State why the voltage dip is less in the self-excited alternator than in brushless or conventional alternators. (6)
Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Compounded means that the excitation is derived from both the generator’s output voltage and its output current.
- On no-load, excitation to the generator is provided by the PRI.1 winding of the excitation transformer.
- On load, the generator current contributes an additional excitation current via the PRI.2 winding of the transformer. This helps maintain a constant output voltage.
If the excitation components are carefully designed, the output voltage of a compounded generator can be kept virtually constant across all load conditions, without the use of an AVR or manual voltage trimmer.
However, some generator manufacturers include:
- AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and
- Manual trimmer rheostat
even in such compounded static excitation systems. These additions:
- Allow finer voltage regulation over the load range, and
- Enable manual voltage control, useful during synchronising and kVAr load sharing between generators.
A practical three-phase static excitation system typically includes additional components such as:
The circuit shown in the referenced figure contains no AVR or manual trimmer regulator. In such a system, any surge in load current feeds back automatically to adjust the field excitation. This correction happens so rapidly that the output voltage remains practically constant.
Important: Compound excitation systems must have their static components precisely matched to the generator they are designed to operate with.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an a.c. generator using a sketch to show how arcing is controlled.
(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would required following such event.
(c) Give a Safe procedure to follow should a train circuit breaker fail to open under fault condition.
Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.
Main Components:
- Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
- Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
- Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
- Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
- The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
- The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
- In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
- This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).
Checks following the event:
- Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
- Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
- Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
- Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
- Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
- Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
- Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
- After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
- Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
- Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) With respect to measuring instruments, what is the difference between analogue and digital measuring instruments. Explain the working principle of each type.
(b) Describe with the aid of simple sketches one analogue and one digital measuring instrument you have used onboard.
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles
Analogue Instruments
Definition:
- An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.
Working Principle:
- The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
- In a typical analogue electrical meter:
- The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
- This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
- A spring provides a balancing torque.
- The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).
Digital Instruments
Definition:
- A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).
Working Principle:
- The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
- In a typical digital meter:
- The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
- An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
- A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
- The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.
(b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard
1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
Working Principle:
- The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
- When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
- This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
- Applications Onboard:
- Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
- Advantages:
- Rugged construction and no power requirement.
- Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.
2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter
Working Principle:
- A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
- The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
- The signal is digitised by an ADC.
- The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
- The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
- For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
- Applications Onboard:
- Checking 24V DC control circuits.
- Verifying generator phase voltages.
- Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) In a.c. generators, voltage dip occurs in two stages.
(i) Sketch a voltage-time graph showing the pattern of voltage dip.
(ii) Referring to this graph, state with reasons the effect on the electrical system of a small power installation when a large load is suddenly switched.
(b) Explain EACH of the following categories of voltage control:
(i) Error operated;
(ii) Functional.
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The regulation state that the voltage must recover within 1.5 seconds. However an acceptable recovery time would be 0.5 seconds for a brushless and 0.2 seconds or less for a compounded machine.
(ii) Effect on small power installation:
When a large load is suddenly applied, the electrical system experiences a significant voltage dip. Initially, there is a sharp drop in voltage due to the high inrush current drawn by the load. This is followed by a slower decrease as the alternator's reactance and power factor affect the voltage. During this period, the alternator’s excitation system, AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and prime mover governor work to restore the voltage.
The sudden load causes a drop in power factor, increasing the reactive power demand on the system. If the voltage dip is significant and prolonged, sensitive equipment may malfunction, and other connected loads might experience disruptions. The system's ability to recover depends on the alternator's capacity, excitation response, and governor speed control.
In this method, the output voltage of the bus bar is continuously measured and compared to the normal rated voltage. Any deviation from the desired voltage generates an error signal, which is sent to the excitation system. This error signal adjusts the excitation to regulate the output voltage. For instance, if the voltage drops, the excitation current is increased, and if the voltage rises, the excitation is reduced.
Examples of error-operated voltage control include brushless alternators with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and alternators using a carbon pile AVR and DC exciter.
(ii) Functional Voltage Control:
This type of voltage control is directly based on the instantaneous value of the voltage. If the voltage falls, the excitation is increased proportionally to the amount of voltage drop, and vice versa. Since the excitation is a direct function of the voltage, it is referred to as functional voltage control.
Static excitation systems are an example of functional voltage control. These systems offer faster response times compared to error-operated methods, making them suitable for applications requiring precise and rapid voltage regulation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
In some circumstances electrical current may be induced in the shafting of rotating machinery.
(a) State the problem that may be caused by this current.
(b) Explain with the aid of sketches, how currents may be avoided or reduced in the following instances
(i) d.c. mahcines
(ii) main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Electrical currents induced in the shafting of rotating machinery flow through the bearings, journals and the machine frame. As the current passes through the bearing oil film it can cause sparking (electric discharge machining), which pits and scores the bearing surfaces and the journal.
- This leads to rapid bearing wear, overheating, and eventual bearing failure. The pitting (frosting) of the bearing and shaft surfaces is characteristic of shaft currents.
- In d.c. machines, shaft currents can also cause sparking at the commutator and damage to the brushes.
- The currents are caused by magnetic asymmetry in the machine (e.g. unbalanced magnetic pull, eccentric rotor, segmented stator laminations, or a circulating flux linking the shaft) which induces an e.m.f. along the shaft.
(i) d.c. machines:
- The shaft is insulated from the frame at one end by fitting an insulated bearing (a bearing with an insulating layer between the bearing housing and the frame, or an insulated bearing liner). This breaks the circulating current path through the shaft and frame.
- The other bearing is left earthed (metallic) so that any residual current has a defined path and does not pass through the insulated bearing.
- A brush (earthing brush) may be fitted to the shaft to collect and earth any residual shaft current, preventing it from passing through the bearings.
- Ensuring the magnetic circuit is symmetrical and the air gap is uniform reduces the unbalanced magnetic pull that induces shaft currents.
(ii) Main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller:
- The bronze propeller and the steel shaft form a galvanic couple in seawater, and the shaft can carry current due to the propeller earthing effect and any stray currents.
- The shaft is insulated from the propeller (insulating coupling or insulating sleeve between the propeller and the shaft) to break the electrical path.
- An earthing brush (shaft earthing brush) is fitted to the shaft to provide a low-resistance path to earth, so that any current is conducted to earth through the brush rather than through the bearings and stern gland.
- The shaft earthing brush also prevents electrolytic corrosion of the propeller and shaft and reduces the risk of bearing damage from shaft currents.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Explain the significance of the root mean square value of an alternating current or voltage wave form. Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)
(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (10)
(i) peak load current,
(ii) DC load current,
(iii) AC load current.
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.
Supply voltage, $$V_{rms} = 110\ V$$
Diode internal resistance, $$R_D = 20\ \Omega$$
Load resistance, $$R_L = 1000\ \Omega$$
The total resistance in the conducting circuit is:
$$R_T = R_D + R_L$$
$$R_T = 20 + 1000 = 1020\ \Omega$$
(i) Peak Load Current
The peak value of the supply voltage is:
$$V_{peak} = \sqrt{2}\,V_{rms}$$
$$V_{peak} = 1.414 \times 110 = 155.56\ V$$
Therefore, the peak load current is:
$$I_{peak} = \frac{V_{peak}}{R_T}$$
$$I_{peak} = \frac{155.56}{1020} = 0.1525\ A$$
Peak load current:
$$I_{peak}\approx0.153\ A=153\ mA$$
(ii) DC Load Current
For a half-wave rectifier, the average or DC value of current is:
$$I_{DC} = \frac{I_{peak}}{\pi}$$
$$I_{DC} = \frac{0.1525}{3.142} = 0.0485\ A$$
DC load current:
$$I_{DC}\approx0.0485\ A=48.5\ mA$$
(iii) AC Load Current
For a half-wave rectified current, the RMS load current is:
$$I_{RMS} = \frac{I_{peak}}{2}$$
$$I_{RMS} = \frac{0.1525}{2} = 0.07625\ A$$
The AC component of the load current is:
$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{I_{RMS}^{2}-I_{DC}^{2}}$$
$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{(0.07625)^2-(0.0485)^2}$$
$$I_{AC} \approx 0.0588\ A$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt. what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)
(b) A d.c. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2 Ω. The machine has 6 poles and the armature is lap connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate: (10)
(a) The speed,
(b) The gross torque developed by the armature.
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier (peak detector) consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). Output taken across the capacitor/load.
- During the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load. If the time constant R x C is large compared with the period, the output is held near Vm.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode and large time constant), i.e. a d.c. voltage close to Vm with small ripple.
- Back e.m.f. E = V - Ia Ra = 480 - 110 x 0.2 = 480 - 22 = 458 V.
- For a lap-connected armature, number of parallel paths A = number of poles P = 6.
- E.m.f. equation: E = (P x Z x phi x N) / (60 x A). Since A = P, E = (Z x phi x N)/60.
- (i) Speed: N = (E x 60)/(Z x phi) = (458 x 60)/(864 x 0.05) = 27480/43.2 = 636.1 rev/min.
- (ii) Gross torque developed: T = (P x Z x phi)/(2 pi A) x Ia = (6 x 864 x 0.05)/(2 x 3.1416 x 6) x 110 = (259.2/37.70) x 110 = 6.876 x 110 = 756.4 N m.
- (Check: armature power = E x Ia = 458 x 110 = 50,380 W; angular speed = 2 pi x 636.1/60 = 66.6 rad/s; T = 50380/66.6 = 756.5 N m.)
So speed = 636 rev/min and gross torque = 756 N m.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x
Discuss the criteria of the classification of marine high voltage for A.C. and D.C. Systems. Sketch a Ships high voltage distribution system and explain its features. Discuss the various methods of testing the insulation of HV system. Mention the significance of PI test, why 3 terminals insulation testers are used in HV insulation measurements. (16)
Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:
- AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
- DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
- Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.
Ships High Voltage Distribution System:
- 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
- High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
- HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
- High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
- High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
- High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
- Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
- Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.
Methods of Testing HV Insulation
Megger Testing:
- This involves applying a high DC voltage (e.g., 5000 V DC for a 6.6 kV system) using a megger to measure insulation resistance. A minimum insulation resistance is specified (e.g., (kV + 10) MΩ; for 6.6 kV, this would be at least 7.6 MΩ). This test checks for insulation degradation.
Polarization Index (PI) Test:
- This test is performed when low insulation resistance is detected. It measures the ratio of insulation resistance after 10 minutes of applying voltage to the resistance after 1 minute. A PI value greater than 1.1 generally indicates that the insulation is absorbing moisture, and may be improved by further heating (for example, with an infrared lamp to dry the windings). A PI of 1 shows damaged winding insulation requiring rewinding.
- The Polarization Index (PI) Test is particularly significant as it helps in detecting moisture presence, assessing insulation aging, and informing maintenance decisions. Low PI values can indicate moisture presence, while higher values suggest better insulation quality.
3-Terminal Insulation Testers:
- These testers offer improved safety. One terminal is firmly grounded. Any leakage current flows through the earth connection, preventing electric shock to the user during testing.
Advantages of 3-Terminal Insulation Testers:
- Increased safety for operators, especially in high-voltage systems.
- Ensures reliable insulation resistance measurements even in adverse conditions.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Briefly explain the principle of Operation of induction Motors (4)
(b) What is slip for an induction motor? (4)
(c) Draw a simple ladder logic diagram of star delta starting of an induction motor. (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The rotor, typically a squirrel cage design made of copper or aluminum bars, is placed inside this rotating field. As the magnetic field rotates, it induces an electric current in the rotor bars, which generates its own magnetic field.
The interaction between the stator’s rotating magnetic field and the rotor’s magnetic field creates a torque, causing the rotor to turn. The rotor always lags slightly behind the stator's rotating field, which is why it operates at a slightly lower speed than synchronous speed. This process allows the motor to efficiently convert electrical energy into mechanical motion without needing additional starting components.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)
(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in same direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each section of round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the mains at the load where it is lowest. (10)
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
- Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
- Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
- The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
- Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
- Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
- The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
- In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
- Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
- Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
- Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
- Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
- Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:
0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y
0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)
0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x
0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.
- y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
- So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
- Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
- Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
- Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
- (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
- The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.
So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 4x
Differentiate between half and full wave rectification. State where half wave rectification may be used and the purpose for which it is not well adapted. Sketch a bridge connection by which full wave rectification may be obtained. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The difference between half wave and full wave rectification:
Half-wave rectification:
- Uses a single diode to allow only one-half of the AC waveform (either the positive or negative half-cycle) to pass through. The other half is blocked.
- Results in a pulsating DC output with a significant amount of ripple (variation in voltage). The average DC voltage is lower compared to the input AC voltage.
- Simpler to implement, requiring only one diode, but less efficient because it wastes half of the input power.
- The average output current is 0.318 times the peak input current. The RMS value is 0.5 times the peak input current.
Half-wave rectification is not well adopted because:
- Less Average current
- Less average RMS
- High pulsation output
- Lower voltage developed
- More ripple as compared to others
- Efficiency is less as compared to others.
Full-wave rectification:
- Uses either two diodes in a centre-tapped transformer configuration or four diodes in a bridge rectifier configuration to utilize both halves of the AC waveform.
- Produces a pulsating DC output with less ripple than half-wave rectification, resulting in a smoother DC output and a higher average DC voltage.
- More efficient as it uses both halves of the input AC waveform.
- Requires more components (two or four diodes), but provides a more efficient and improved DC output. The average output current is 0.6365 times the peak input current, and the RMS value is 0.707 times the peak input current.
Sketch of bridge connection for full wave rectification:
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three-phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (6)
(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (5)
(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed? (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.
On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.
By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.
In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.
Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) (i) Sketch a diagrammatic arrangement of a static or self-excited alternator. (5)
(ii) Describe the operation of the self-excited alternator. (5)
(b) State why the voltage dip is less in the self-excited alternator than in brushless or conventional alternators. (6)
Appeared In: Nov 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Compounded means that the excitation is derived from both the generator’s output voltage and its output current.
- On no-load, excitation to the generator is provided by the PRI.1 winding of the excitation transformer.
- On load, the generator current contributes an additional excitation current via the PRI.2 winding of the transformer. This helps maintain a constant output voltage.
If the excitation components are carefully designed, the output voltage of a compounded generator can be kept virtually constant across all load conditions, without the use of an AVR or manual voltage trimmer.
However, some generator manufacturers include:
- AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and
- Manual trimmer rheostat
even in such compounded static excitation systems. These additions:
- Allow finer voltage regulation over the load range, and
- Enable manual voltage control, useful during synchronising and kVAr load sharing between generators.
A practical three-phase static excitation system typically includes additional components such as:
The circuit shown in the referenced figure contains no AVR or manual trimmer regulator. In such a system, any surge in load current feeds back automatically to adjust the field excitation. This correction happens so rapidly that the output voltage remains practically constant.
Important: Compound excitation systems must have their static components precisely matched to the generator they are designed to operate with.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Briefly explain the principle of Operation of Induction Motors (4)
(b) What is slip for an induction motor? (4)
(c) Draw a simple ladder logic diagram of star delta starting of an induction motor. (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The rotor, typically a squirrel cage design made of copper or aluminum bars, is placed inside this rotating field. As the magnetic field rotates, it induces an electric current in the rotor bars, which generates its own magnetic field.
The interaction between the stator’s rotating magnetic field and the rotor’s magnetic field creates a torque, causing the rotor to turn. The rotor always lags slightly behind the stator's rotating field, which is why it operates at a slightly lower speed than synchronous speed. This process allows the motor to efficiently convert electrical energy into mechanical motion without needing additional starting components.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
What is Zener diode and how does it regulate the voltage? What happens to the series current, load current and Zener current when the D.C. input voltage of a Zener regulator increases? Draw a neat diagram of Zener regulator and explain. (16)
Appeared In: Mar 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A Zener Diode, also known as a breakdown diode, is a heavily doped semiconductor device that is designed to operate in the reverse direction.
In the reverse biased state if a voltage smaller than the breakdown voltage is applied to a zener it will not conduct more than its leakage current but if a high enough voltage is applied the zener will start to conduct. As can be seen from the normal diode characteristic, when the diode breaks down, the voltage across it is (ideally) constant regardless of the current that it is carrying. Zener diodes are manufactured with specific breakdown voltages ranging from a few volts to a few hundred volts. If they are incorporated in circuits with resistors then the voltage across the zener will be constant even in the event of a surge in supply voltage.
When the d.c. input voltage of a zener regulator increases, Zener current and Series current increases, but the load current remains unchanged.
There is a series resistor connected to the circuit in order to limit the current into the diode. It is connected to the positive terminal of the d.c. Current through the diode increases when the voltage across the diode tends to increase which results in the voltage drop across the resistor. Similarly, the current through the diode decreases when the voltage across the diode tends to decrease. Here, the voltage drop across the resistor is very less, and the output voltage results normally.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x
Discuss the criteria of the classification of marine high voltage for A.C. and D.C. Systems. Sketch a Ships high voltage distribution system and explain its features. Discuss the various methods of testing the insulation of HV system. Mention the significance of PI Test, why 3 terminals insulation testers are used in HV insulation measurements? (16)
Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:
- AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
- DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
- Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.
Ships High Voltage Distribution System:
- 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
- High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
- HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
- High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
- High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
- High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
- Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
- Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.
Methods of Testing HV Insulation
Megger Testing:
- This involves applying a high DC voltage (e.g., 5000 V DC for a 6.6 kV system) using a megger to measure insulation resistance. A minimum insulation resistance is specified (e.g., (kV + 10) MΩ; for 6.6 kV, this would be at least 7.6 MΩ). This test checks for insulation degradation.
Polarization Index (PI) Test:
- This test is performed when low insulation resistance is detected. It measures the ratio of insulation resistance after 10 minutes of applying voltage to the resistance after 1 minute. A PI value greater than 1.1 generally indicates that the insulation is absorbing moisture, and may be improved by further heating (for example, with an infrared lamp to dry the windings). A PI of 1 shows damaged winding insulation requiring rewinding.
- The Polarization Index (PI) Test is particularly significant as it helps in detecting moisture presence, assessing insulation aging, and informing maintenance decisions. Low PI values can indicate moisture presence, while higher values suggest better insulation quality.
3-Terminal Insulation Testers:
- These testers offer improved safety. One terminal is firmly grounded. Any leakage current flows through the earth connection, preventing electric shock to the user during testing.
Advantages of 3-Terminal Insulation Testers:
- Increased safety for operators, especially in high-voltage systems.
- Ensures reliable insulation resistance measurements even in adverse conditions.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series Motor or cumulative compound motor? Explain. (6)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced by 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:
$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$
Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.
Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.
Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to a 3 speed A.C. cage motor driven cargo winch:
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor. (8)
(b) Describe how speed changes and braking are achieved. (8)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed Change:
The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:
$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$
Where,
Ns = Synchronous speed.
f = Frequency of power supply.
P = number of poles.
Methods to Achieve Speed Change:
Multiple Stator Windings:
- Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.
Consequent Pole Method:
- A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.
Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):
- Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.
Braking Mechanism:
Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.
Plugging:
- Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.
Rheostatic Braking:
- In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.
Regenerative Braking:
- For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)
(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in same direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest. (10)
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
- Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
- Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
- The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
- Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
- Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
- The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
- In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
- Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
- Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
- Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
- Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
- Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:
0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y
0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)
0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x
0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.
- y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
- So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
- Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
- Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
- Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
- (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
- The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.
So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an A.C. generator using a sketch to show how arcing is controlled. (6)
(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would require following such event. (5)
(c) Give a safe procedure to follow should a main circuit breaker fail to open under fault Condition. (5)
Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.
Main Components:
- Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
- Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
- Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
- Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
- The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
- The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
- In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
- This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).
Checks following the event:
- Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
- Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
- Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
- Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
- Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
- Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
- Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
- After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
- Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
- Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) With respect to measuring instruments what is the difference between analogue and digital measuring instruments. Explain the working principle of each type. (6)
(b) Describe with the aid of simple sketches one analogue and one digital measuring instrument you have used onboard. (10)
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles
Analogue Instruments
Definition:
- An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.
Working Principle:
- The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
- In a typical analogue electrical meter:
- The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
- This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
- A spring provides a balancing torque.
- The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).
Digital Instruments
Definition:
- A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).
Working Principle:
- The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
- In a typical digital meter:
- The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
- An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
- A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
- The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.
(b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard
1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
Working Principle:
- The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
- When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
- This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
- Applications Onboard:
- Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
- Advantages:
- Rugged construction and no power requirement.
- Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.
2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter
Working Principle:
- A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
- The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
- The signal is digitised by an ADC.
- The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
- The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
- For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
- Applications Onboard:
- Checking 24V DC control circuits.
- Verifying generator phase voltages.
- Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) In A.C. generators, voltage dip occurs in two stages.
(i) Sketch a voltage-time graph showing the pattern of voltage dip. (4)
(ii) Referring to this graph, state with reasons the effect on the electrical system of a small power installation when a large load is suddenly switched on. (4)
(b) Explain EACH of the following categories of voltage control:
(i) Error operated. (4)
(ii) Functional. (4)
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The regulation state that the voltage must recover within 1.5 seconds. However an acceptable recovery time would be 0.5 seconds for a brushless and 0.2 seconds or less for a compounded machine.
(ii) Effect on small power installation:
When a large load is suddenly applied, the electrical system experiences a significant voltage dip. Initially, there is a sharp drop in voltage due to the high inrush current drawn by the load. This is followed by a slower decrease as the alternator's reactance and power factor affect the voltage. During this period, the alternator’s excitation system, AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and prime mover governor work to restore the voltage.
The sudden load causes a drop in power factor, increasing the reactive power demand on the system. If the voltage dip is significant and prolonged, sensitive equipment may malfunction, and other connected loads might experience disruptions. The system's ability to recover depends on the alternator's capacity, excitation response, and governor speed control.
In this method, the output voltage of the bus bar is continuously measured and compared to the normal rated voltage. Any deviation from the desired voltage generates an error signal, which is sent to the excitation system. This error signal adjusts the excitation to regulate the output voltage. For instance, if the voltage drops, the excitation current is increased, and if the voltage rises, the excitation is reduced.
Examples of error-operated voltage control include brushless alternators with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and alternators using a carbon pile AVR and DC exciter.
(ii) Functional Voltage Control:
This type of voltage control is directly based on the instantaneous value of the voltage. If the voltage falls, the excitation is increased proportionally to the amount of voltage drop, and vice versa. Since the excitation is a direct function of the voltage, it is referred to as functional voltage control.
Static excitation systems are an example of functional voltage control. These systems offer faster response times compared to error-operated methods, making them suitable for applications requiring precise and rapid voltage regulation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
In some circumstances electrical current may be induced into the shafting of rotating machinery.
(a) State the problem that may be caused by this current. (6)
(b) Explain with aid of sketches, how currents may be avoided or reduced in the following instances:
(i) D.C machines
(ii) Main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller (10)
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Electrical currents induced in the shafting of rotating machinery flow through the bearings, journals and the machine frame. As the current passes through the bearing oil film it can cause sparking (electric discharge machining), which pits and scores the bearing surfaces and the journal.
- This leads to rapid bearing wear, overheating, and eventual bearing failure. The pitting (frosting) of the bearing and shaft surfaces is characteristic of shaft currents.
- In d.c. machines, shaft currents can also cause sparking at the commutator and damage to the brushes.
- The currents are caused by magnetic asymmetry in the machine (e.g. unbalanced magnetic pull, eccentric rotor, segmented stator laminations, or a circulating flux linking the shaft) which induces an e.m.f. along the shaft.
(i) d.c. machines:
- The shaft is insulated from the frame at one end by fitting an insulated bearing (a bearing with an insulating layer between the bearing housing and the frame, or an insulated bearing liner). This breaks the circulating current path through the shaft and frame.
- The other bearing is left earthed (metallic) so that any residual current has a defined path and does not pass through the insulated bearing.
- A brush (earthing brush) may be fitted to the shaft to collect and earth any residual shaft current, preventing it from passing through the bearings.
- Ensuring the magnetic circuit is symmetrical and the air gap is uniform reduces the unbalanced magnetic pull that induces shaft currents.
(ii) Main shafting fitted with a bronze propeller:
- The bronze propeller and the steel shaft form a galvanic couple in seawater, and the shaft can carry current due to the propeller earthing effect and any stray currents.
- The shaft is insulated from the propeller (insulating coupling or insulating sleeve between the propeller and the shaft) to break the electrical path.
- An earthing brush (shaft earthing brush) is fitted to the shaft to provide a low-resistance path to earth, so that any current is conducted to earth through the brush rather than through the bearings and stern gland.
- The shaft earthing brush also prevents electrolytic corrosion of the propeller and shaft and reduces the risk of bearing damage from shaft currents.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Explain the significance of the root-mean-square value of an alternating current or voltage waveform: Define the form factor of such a wave form. (6)
(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate
(i) peak load current,
(ii) DC load current,
(iii) AC load current. (10)
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The form factor of an AC waveform is the ratio of its RMS value to its average value. For a perfect sine wave, the form factor is approximately 1.11 (RMS value/Average Value = 1.11). This factor indicates how closely a waveform resembles a pure sine wave; a form factor closer to 1.11 suggests a waveform that is more sinusoidal.
Supply voltage, $$V_{rms} = 110\ V$$
Diode internal resistance, $$R_D = 20\ \Omega$$
Load resistance, $$R_L = 1000\ \Omega$$
The total resistance in the conducting circuit is:
$$R_T = R_D + R_L$$
$$R_T = 20 + 1000 = 1020\ \Omega$$
(i) Peak Load Current
The peak value of the supply voltage is:
$$V_{peak} = \sqrt{2}\,V_{rms}$$
$$V_{peak} = 1.414 \times 110 = 155.56\ V$$
Therefore, the peak load current is:
$$I_{peak} = \frac{V_{peak}}{R_T}$$
$$I_{peak} = \frac{155.56}{1020} = 0.1525\ A$$
Peak load current:
$$I_{peak}\approx0.153\ A=153\ mA$$
(ii) DC Load Current
For a half-wave rectifier, the average or DC value of current is:
$$I_{DC} = \frac{I_{peak}}{\pi}$$
$$I_{DC} = \frac{0.1525}{3.142} = 0.0485\ A$$
DC load current:
$$I_{DC}\approx0.0485\ A=48.5\ mA$$
(iii) AC Load Current
For a half-wave rectified current, the RMS load current is:
$$I_{RMS} = \frac{I_{peak}}{2}$$
$$I_{RMS} = \frac{0.1525}{2} = 0.07625\ A$$
The AC component of the load current is:
$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{I_{RMS}^{2}-I_{DC}^{2}}$$
$$I_{AC} = \sqrt{(0.07625)^2-(0.0485)^2}$$
$$I_{AC} \approx 0.0588\ A$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vra Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)
(b) A D.C. motor takes an armature current of 110 A at 480 V. The resistance of the armature circuit is 0.2Ω. The machine has six poles and the armature is lap-connected with 864 conductors. The flux per pole is 0.05 Wb. Calculate:
(i) The speed.
(ii) The gross torque developed by the armature. (10)
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier (peak detector) consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). Output taken across the capacitor/load.
- During the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load. If the time constant R x C is large compared with the period, the output is held near Vm.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode and large time constant), i.e. a d.c. voltage close to Vm with small ripple.
- Back e.m.f. E = V - Ia Ra = 480 - 110 x 0.2 = 480 - 22 = 458 V.
- For a lap-connected armature, number of parallel paths A = number of poles P = 6.
- E.m.f. equation: E = (P x Z x phi x N) / (60 x A). Since A = P, E = (Z x phi x N)/60.
- (i) Speed: N = (E x 60)/(Z x phi) = (458 x 60)/(864 x 0.05) = 27480/43.2 = 636.1 rev/min.
- (ii) Gross torque developed: T = (P x Z x phi)/(2 pi A) x Ia = (6 x 864 x 0.05)/(2 x 3.1416 x 6) x 110 = (259.2/37.70) x 110 = 6.876 x 110 = 756.4 N m.
- (Check: armature power = E x Ia = 458 x 110 = 50,380 W; angular speed = 2 pi x 636.1/60 = 66.6 rad/s; T = 50380/66.6 = 756.5 N m.)
So speed = 636 rev/min and gross torque = 756 N m.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to a 3 speed a.c. cage motor driven cargo winch:
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor. (8)
(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved. (8)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed Change:
The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:
$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$
Where,
Ns = Synchronous speed.
f = Frequency of power supply.
P = number of poles.
Methods to Achieve Speed Change:
Multiple Stator Windings:
- Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.
Consequent Pole Method:
- A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.
Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):
- Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.
Braking Mechanism:
Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.
Plugging:
- Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.
Rheostatic Braking:
- In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.
Regenerative Braking:
- For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)
(b) A ring main 900m long is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest. (10)
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
- Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
- Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
- The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
- Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
- Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
- The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
- In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
- Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
- Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
- Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
- Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
- Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:
0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y
0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)
0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x
0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.
- y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
- So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
- Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
- Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
- Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
- (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
- The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.
So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)
(a) (i) Describe the characteristics of a d.c. motor. (8)
(ii) Explain the advantages of such a motor for deck machinery.
(b) Describe with the aid of a sketch a control system for the motor in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A d.c. motor has a high starting torque, which is important for deck machinery such as winches, windlasses and capstans that must start under load.
- The speed can be controlled smoothly over a wide range by varying the armature voltage or the field flux.
- The torque-speed characteristic can be shaped by the type of winding: a series motor gives very high starting torque and a falling speed characteristic (constant power), while a shunt motor gives a nearly constant speed.
- For deck machinery, a compound (cumulative) motor is often used, combining high starting torque with a reasonably stable speed.
- The motor can be reversed easily by reversing the armature or field connections.
- It provides smooth, stepless speed control and can hold a load (e.g. a suspended anchor) without running away.
- (ii) Advantages of such a motor for deck machinery:
- High starting torque to lift heavy loads from rest.
- Smooth, precise speed control for delicate handling of loads.
- Easy and smooth reversal.
- Good speed regulation and ability to hold a load.
- Can be controlled remotely and provides regenerative braking.
- Robust and reliable for marine service.
- A typical control system is a Ward Leonard system or a thyristor (SCR) d.c. drive.
- Ward Leonard: a three-phase induction motor drives a d.c. generator; the generator supplies the d.c. motor armature. The motor field is separately excited and kept constant. By varying the generator field current (via a field rheostat or reversing switch), the voltage applied to the motor armature is varied, giving smooth speed control from zero to full speed in either direction. Reversal is by reversing the generator field.
- Thyristor drive: the a.c. supply is converted to variable d.c. by a controlled rectifier (thyristor bridge). The armature voltage is varied by controlling the firing angle, giving smooth speed control. Reversal is by reversing the armature current or using a reversing contactor.
- The control circuit includes: start/stop push buttons, speed control (rheostat or firing-angle control), overload protection, field failure protection, and limit switches for the deck machinery.
- The sketch shows the supply, the controller, the motor with its armature and field, and the control/protection devices.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x
Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between two of the following types of electronic circuits.
(a) Rectifier circuit (6)
(b) Amplifier circuit (5)
(c) Oscillator circuit (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Rectifier Circuit
- Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
- Input: AC signal.
- Output: DC signal.
- Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
- Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
- Feedback: No feedback involved.
- Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.
The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.
(b) Amplifier Circuit
- Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
- Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
- Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
- Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
- Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
- Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
- Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.
This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.
(c) Oscillator Circuit
- Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
- Input: DC supply.
- Output: AC signal.
- Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
- Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
- Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
- Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Describe the circuit breaker for an a.c. generator using a sketch to show how arcing controlled. (6)
(b) Explain the sequence of events that might occur if the breaker opens on a short circuit and state the check you would require following such event. (5)
(c) Give a safe procedure to follow should a main circuit breaker fail to open under fault Condition. (5)
Appeared In: Mar 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The circuit breaker used for an A.C. generator is typically an Air Break Circuit Breaker. It is frame-mounted and of the draw-out type, allowing it to be isolated from the busbar and alternator input contacts by moving it horizontally. An interlock ensures the breaker is turned off before being drawn out.
Main Components:
- Contacts: High-conductivity, silver-coated copper contacts ensure efficient current flow.
- Arcing Contacts: Separate arcing contacts protect the main contacts by taking the arc during the operation. These arcing contacts open slightly after the main contacts and are replaceable.
- Arc Chutes and Splitter Plates: Electromagnetic forces guide the arc to the arcing horn, where the arc is elongated and quenched. The arc is divided into sections by splitter plates, effectively extinguishing it.
- Anti-Bouncing Devices: These prevent rebound of the contacts, ensuring a clean break.
- The circuit breaker's protection system (e.g., overcurrent relay) detects an excessive current flow indicating a short circuit.
- The breaker opens, interrupting the flow of current and preventing further damage. If only one generator is operating, a complete blackout occurs. If generators are in parallel, the load is transferred to the other generator(s), potentially causing an overload trip.
- In a parallel system, the remaining generator(s) assume the load, which may overload them and trigger a trip.
- This can lead to a complete system shutdown (blackout).
Checks following the event:
- Open the backside of the switchboard associated with the tripped generator and inspect for short circuits.
- Check all outgoing feeders individually to locate and clear the fault.
- Inspect the affected generator’s armature, field circuit, AVR, and connections for insulation resistance, physical damage, and overheating.
- Immediately operate the emergency manual trip mechanism to isolate the affected generator.
- Completely isolate the generator from the system by switching off its supply and load. This is the most important step to prevent further damage.
- Open the generator's field circuit supply to cease voltage generation.
- Once the generator is fully isolated, proceed to locate and clear the fault.
- After the fault is resolved, perform insulation resistance tests on the armature, field, and AVR circuits.
- Thoroughly inspect all components of the generator for any damage or overheating.
- Once the fault is rectified and all checks are satisfactory, the alternator can be safely brought back into service.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection for alternators intended for operation. (4)
(b) (i) Sketch a reverse power trip. (6)
(ii) Briefly explain the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated. (6)
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse power protection is essential to safeguard alternators in parallel operation from the adverse effects of reverse power flow. When the prime mover of an alternator fails to provide sufficient torque, the alternator starts acting as a motor and draws power from the busbar—a condition known as the motoring effect. This situation can cause significant damage to the prime mover, as it may overspeed due to the additional energy supplied by the alternator. Such overspeed can lead to mechanical failures, including damaged shafts and broken turbine blades.
Furthermore, the reverse power effect imposes additional loads on other alternators in the system. These alternators may overload and trip due to excessive power demands, potentially leading to a blackout that compromises the safety and operational reliability of the vessel. The alternator subjected to reverse power may also lose its residual magnetism, impairing its ability to generate power effectively when restored.
To mitigate these risks, a reverse power relay is installed. This relay monitors the direction of power flow and trips the circuit breaker if reverse power exceeds a preset threshold (typically 10% of full load). The relay incorporates a time delay to prevent tripping due to transient conditions during synchronization or other short-term disturbances.
(ii) Principle of operation and tripping activation
The reverse power relay operates on the principle of detecting the direction of power flow using the interaction of magnetic fields. The voltage coil generates a magnetic field lagging the voltage by approximately 90°, while the current coil produces a magnetic field proportional to the load current. Both fields interact with the aluminum disc, inducing eddy currents that create a torque.
During normal power flow, the torque rotates the disc in one direction, keeping the trip contacts open. When power reverses, the direction of the torque changes, causing the disc to rotate in the opposite direction. This rotation closes the trip contacts, activating the breaker trip circuit and disconnecting the alternator.
A time delay (typically 5 seconds) prevents the breaker from tripping due to transient power surges during synchronization. Reverse power settings range from 2–6% for turbine-driven alternators and 8–15% for diesel-driven alternators, accounting for the differences in prime mover characteristics.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
With the aid of sketch describe the main features and principle of operation of a D.C. moving coil meter. If such a meter is designed to give full scale deflection with 150 m, State how it may be adapted: (16)
(a) As an ammeter to read up to 150 A.
(b) As a voltmeter to read up to 150 V.
No calculations are required.
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
D.C. moving coil meter - main features and principle of operation:
- Construction: a permanent magnet with soft-iron pole pieces and a cylindrical soft-iron core creates a uniform radial magnetic field in the air gap. A rectangular coil of fine wire is wound on a light aluminium former and pivoted so it can rotate in the air gap. The coil is mounted on jewel bearings. A hairspring provides the controlling (restoring) torque and also carries the current to the coil. A pointer attached to the coil moves over a calibrated scale. A counterweight balances the pointer.
- Principle: when current flows through the coil, the coil sides in the magnetic field experience a force (F = B I l) producing a deflecting torque proportional to the current (T = B A N I, where A is the coil area, N the number of turns). This torque is opposed by the spring torque (proportional to the angle of deflection). At equilibrium the deflection is proportional to the current, giving a linear (uniform) scale. The damping is provided by eddy currents induced in the aluminium former.
- The meter measures d.c. only (the direction of deflection depends on current direction). It is accurate and sensitive.
Adaptation of a meter giving full-scale deflection with 150 mA (the question states 150 m, i.e. 150 mA):
- A low-resistance shunt is connected in parallel with the meter coil. The shunt carries the bulk of the current (150 A - 150 mA), while only 150 mA passes through the meter. The shunt resistance is chosen so that 150 mA flows through the meter when 150 A flows in the circuit. The shunt is made of a material with a low temperature coefficient (e.g. manganin) and is connected with short, heavy leads. The scale is recalibrated to read up to 150 A.
- A high resistance (multiplier) is connected in series with the meter coil. The series resistance is chosen so that the full-scale current of 150 mA flows when 150 V is applied across the combination. The meter then reads the voltage. The scale is recalibrated to read up to 150 V.
(No calculations required.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to preferential tripping in a marine electrical distribution system:
(a) State why this facility is required. (6)
(b) With the aid of a sketch, describe a typical arrangement to provide three stages of tripping an instantaneous protection against short circuit. (10)
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- In marine electrical systems, continuous power supply to the switchboard is essential to maintain vessel safety. A blackout resulting from the tripping of the alternator breaker can compromise the vessel’s operation and safety.
- The preferential tripping system ensures that the alternator breaker only trips instantly in the event of a severe fault like a short circuit.
- For less severe overcurrent conditions (e.g., 110% of full load), time-delayed relays perform preferential tripping by shedding non-essential loads such as galley equipment, air conditioning, and ventilation fans.
- By reducing the alternator's load incrementally, the system prevents the main breaker from tripping unnecessarily and avoids a complete power blackout, ensuring essential systems remain powered.
operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.
When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows
First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):
- Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
- Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
- Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load
Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
- Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high
Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
- Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.
Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):
- Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
- This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.
Main Breaker Trip
- If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.
Overload Protection and Alarms
- Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor? (6)
(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 Α. (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
- Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
- The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
- The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
- For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
- The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
- The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque. (6)
(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger. (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)
(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together. Between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.
Specifications of the three batteries are given below:
Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Nov 2024 Jun 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
For a star-connected system:
$$V_{line}=\sqrt3\:V_{phase}$$
$$\frac{V_{line}}{V_{phase}}=\sqrt3\:=\:1.732$$
In a star connection, the line current is equal to the phase current:
$$I_{line}=I_{phase}$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to electronic control systems:
(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)
(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Temperature Sensor:
- Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.
Transmitter:
- The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).
Comparator:
- The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.
Temperature Controller:
- This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.
Signal Converter:
- This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.
Actuator (or 3-way Valve):
- The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers
With the aid of a block diagram, briefly describe the effect which negative voltage feedback has on an amplifier and state the advantages resulting from the use of negative feedback. (16)
Appeared In: Oct 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
Q10 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
(a) Draw the complete phasor diagram of the transformer under no-load conditions. (6)
(b) The following results were obtained on a 50 kVA transformer: open-circuit test - primary voltage, 3300 V; secondary voltage, 415 V; primary power, 430 W. Short circuit test - primary voltage, 124 V; primary current, 15.3; primary power, 525 W; secondary current, full-load value.
Calculate: (10)
(a) the efficiencies at full load and at half load for 0.7 power factor.
(b) the voltage regulations for power factor 0.7, (i) lagging,
(ii) leading;
(c) the secondary terminal voltages corresponding to (i) and (ii)
Appeared In: Oct 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The applied primary voltage V1 is taken as the reference phasor.
- The no-load current I0 has two components: the magnetising component Im (in quadrature with V1, lagging by 90 degrees) and the core-loss (active) component Iw (in phase with V1).
- I0 = Iw + Im, and I0 lags V1 by an angle phi0 (the no-load power factor angle), where cos phi0 = Iw/I0.
- The flux phi is in phase with the magnetising current Im (neglecting hysteresis), and the induced e.m.f. E1 (and E2) lag the flux by 90 degrees. E1 is approximately equal and opposite to V1.
- The diagram shows V1, I0, Im, Iw, phi, E1 and E2 with their phase relationships.
- Iron loss (from OC test) = 430 W.
- Full-load copper loss (from SC test) = 525 W.
- Full-load primary current = 50000/3300 = 15.15 A.
- Full load: output = 50 x 0.7 = 35 kW. Losses = 430 + 525 = 955 W. Input = 35,955 W. Efficiency = 35000/35955 = 0.9734 = 97.34%.
- Half load: copper loss = 525 x (0.5)^2 = 131.25 W. Total losses = 430 + 131.25 = 561.25 W. Output = 17.5 kW. Input = 18,061.25 W. Efficiency = 17500/18061.25 = 0.9689 = 96.89%.
- From SC test: equivalent impedance Z = 124/15.3 = 8.105 ohm. Equivalent resistance Req = P/I^2 = 525/15.3^2 = 525/234.1 = 2.243 ohm. Equivalent reactance Xeq = sqrt(8.105^2 - 2.243^2) = sqrt(65.7 - 5.03) = sqrt(60.67) = 7.79 ohm.
- cos phi = 0.7, sin phi = 0.714.
- (i) Lagging: %VR = I (Req cos phi + Xeq sin phi)/V1 x 100 = 15.15 (2.243 x 0.7 + 7.79 x 0.714)/3300 x 100 = 15.15 (1.570 + 5.562)/3300 x 100 = 15.15 x 7.132/3300 x 100 = 108.1/3300 x 100 = 3.28%.
- (ii) Leading: %VR = 15.15 (1.570 - 5.562)/3300 x 100 = 15.15 x (-3.992)/3300 x 100 = -60.5/3300 x 100 = -1.83%.
- Nominal secondary voltage = 415 V.
- (i) Lagging: V2 = 415 (1 - 0.0328) = 415 x 0.9672 = 401.4 V.
- (ii) Leading: V2 = 415 (1 + 0.0183) = 415 x 1.0183 = 422.6 V.
So efficiency = 97.34% (full load) and 96.89% (half load); regulation = 3.28% lagging and -1.83% leading; secondary voltages = 401.4 V (lagging) and 422.6 V (leading).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)
(a) Explain the construction and working principle of Star-Delta Starter with the help of circuit diagram. What are the advantages and limitations of using a Star-Delta Starter for starting an induction motor. (10)
(b) Describe the maintenance procedures for a motor starter. What are the common faults, and how would you troubleshoot them. (6)
Appeared In: Sep 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Construction: the starter has three contactors - a main (line) contactor, a star contactor, and a delta contactor - together with a timer (time delay relay), an overload relay, fuses/MCCB, start and stop push buttons, and an indicating lamp. The motor has six terminals (U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2) brought out to the starter.
- Working principle: on pressing start, the main and star contactors close, connecting the motor windings in star. Each winding then receives phase voltage (line voltage / root 3), so the starting current is reduced to about one third of the DOL value, and the starting torque to about one third. The motor accelerates under reduced voltage. After a preset time (set by the timer, allowing the motor to reach near rated speed), the star contactor opens and the delta contactor closes, reconnecting the windings in delta so each winding receives full line voltage and the motor runs at rated condition.
- Advantages:
- Starting current is reduced to about one third of the DOL starting current, reducing the voltage dip on the supply.
- Simple, robust, and relatively cheap.
- No extra losses during running (the motor runs in delta at full voltage).
- Reduces mechanical shock during starting.
- Limitations:
- Starting torque is reduced to about one third of the DOL torque, so it cannot start a load requiring high starting torque.
- The changeover from star to delta causes a current and torque surge.
- Only suitable for motors that can be started on reduced voltage and that run in delta (normally delta-connected motors).
- The motor must be designed for star-delta starting (six terminals available).
- Maintenance: regularly inspect and clean the contactor contacts (check for pitting, burning, and correct contact pressure); check and tighten all electrical connections; check the timer setting; test the overload relay and reset it; check the fuses/MCCB; lubricate moving parts; check the coil for correct operation and voltage; check for loose wiring, moisture, and dust; verify the earth connection; periodically test the starter operation and the insulation resistance.
- Common faults and troubleshooting:
- Motor does not start: check the supply, fuses/MCCB, control circuit, start button, contactor coil, and overload relay (may be tripped). Check for a blown fuse or an open circuit in the control wiring.
- Contactor chatters or fails to hold: check the coil voltage, the holding contact, and the supply; a low voltage or a faulty holding contact causes chattering.
- Motor starts in star but fails to change to delta: check the timer, the delta contactor, and its coil and contacts.
- Overload relay trips frequently: check for an actual overload, incorrect relay setting, single-phasing, or a faulty relay.
- Burnt or pitted contacts: caused by frequent operation, arcing, or a faulty coil; clean or replace the contacts.
- Single-phasing: check the fuses and connections on all three phases; a blown fuse causes the motor to run on two phases and overheat.
- Always isolate and lock off the supply before working on the starter.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x
Explain the methods used to control the speed of a 3 Phase induction motors. Draw and Explain a Variable Frequency Drive used for optimization of energy efficiency of auxiliary machineries on board vessels. (16)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Methods used to control the speed of a 3-phase induction motor:
- Pole changing: by reconnecting the stator winding (Dahlander or consequent-pole connection) the number of poles is changed, giving discrete synchronous speeds (N = 120 f/P). Simple and efficient but only a few fixed speeds.
- Rotor resistance (slip-ring motors): inserting resistance in the rotor circuit increases the slip and reduces the speed. Simple but inefficient (slip power is lost as heat) and gives poor speed regulation.
- Variable voltage: reducing the stator voltage increases the slip and reduces the speed, but the torque is also reduced and the method is inefficient and gives poor regulation.
- Variable frequency (VFD): varying the supply frequency changes the synchronous speed. This is the most efficient and gives smooth, continuous speed control over a wide range. The voltage is varied in proportion to the frequency (V/f constant) to maintain constant flux and torque.
- Cascade and Scherbius/Kramer systems: used for large motors to recover slip power and give a few efficient speeds.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) for energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery:
- A VFD consists of three main stages:
- Rectifier: converts the a.c. supply to d.c. (a diode or thyristor bridge).
- D.C. link: a capacitor (and inductor) smooths the d.c. voltage.
- Inverter: converts the d.c. back to a.c. at a variable frequency and voltage using IGBTs switched by pulse-width modulation (PWM).
- The control unit varies the output frequency and voltage (maintaining a constant V/f ratio) to control the motor speed.
- Operation: the VFD supplies the motor with a variable-frequency, variable-voltage supply. By controlling the frequency, the synchronous speed and hence the motor speed are controlled. The V/f ratio is kept constant so the air-gap flux and torque capability are maintained. The motor runs at low slip at each speed, so the efficiency is high.
- Energy efficiency: for auxiliary machinery such as pumps, fans and compressors, the load power varies with the cube of the speed (for fans and pumps). By reducing the speed with a VFD instead of throttling or using a fixed speed, the power consumption is greatly reduced. The VFD matches the motor speed to the actual demand, saving energy, reducing wear, and giving soft starting (reduced starting current and mechanical shock). This is why VFDs are widely used to optimise the energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery on board vessels.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
What is the meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labelling all the important parts. explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator. (16)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.
In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.
A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.
- Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
- Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
- Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
- Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
- Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electrical Safety & Protection
(a) Explain the construction, working principle, and characteristics of a Zener Diode. Discuss its applications in electronic circuits. (8)
(b) What is a Zener Barrier? With the help of a diagram, explain how a Zener Barrier works in an intrinsic Safe Circuit and discuss its importance in hazardous environments. (8)
Appeared In: Sep 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Construction: a Zener diode is a heavily doped p-n junction diode designed to operate in the reverse breakdown region. The heavy doping gives a very narrow depletion region, so the breakdown voltage is low and well defined.
- Working principle: in the forward direction it behaves like a normal diode. In the reverse direction, when the reverse voltage reaches the Zener (breakdown) voltage Vz, the diode breaks down and conducts heavily, but the voltage across it remains almost constant at Vz over a wide range of reverse current. This is due to Zener breakdown (for low voltages) or avalanche breakdown (for higher voltages).
- Characteristics: the reverse characteristic shows a sharp knee at the Zener voltage; beyond this the current rises steeply while the voltage stays nearly constant. The forward characteristic is like a normal diode. The Zener voltage is specified at a particular test current, and the dynamic resistance (dV/dI) is small in the breakdown region.
- Applications: voltage regulation (a Zener diode maintains a constant output voltage across a load despite variations in input voltage or load current); as a voltage reference; in voltage clamping and protection circuits (limiting overvoltage); in waveform shaping; and in power supplies as a shunt regulator.
- A Zener barrier is a safety device used to limit the energy (voltage and current) reaching a hazardous area so that it cannot ignite a flammable atmosphere. It is fitted between the safe area (control equipment) and the hazardous area (field instruments).
- Construction: the barrier contains Zener diodes, a series resistor (current-limiting), and a fuse, all encapsulated in a flameproof housing and earthed to a high-integrity earth.
- Working principle: under normal operation the Zener diodes do not conduct and the signal passes through the series resistor to the hazardous area. If a fault causes the voltage to rise above the Zener voltage, the Zener diodes conduct and clamp the voltage to a safe level, and the fuse blows to protect the diodes. The series resistor limits the current to a safe value. Thus the energy (voltage and current) reaching the hazardous area is limited to intrinsically safe levels, below the minimum ignition energy of the gas.
- Importance in hazardous environments: it prevents the ignition of flammable gases or vapours by limiting the electrical energy in the circuit. It allows standard (non-intrinsically safe) control equipment to be used with intrinsically safe field instruments, providing safety in tankers, gas carriers, and other hazardous areas. The barrier must be correctly earthed and certified for the hazardous area classification.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series Motor or cumulative compound motor? Explain. (6)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced by 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:
$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$
Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.
Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.
Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to electronic control systems:
(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)
(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Temperature Sensor:
- Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.
Transmitter:
- The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).
Comparator:
- The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.
Temperature Controller:
- This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.
Signal Converter:
- This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.
Actuator (or 3-way Valve):
- The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams. (16)
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.
Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.
For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.
Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.
The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)
(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current fails to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger. (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)
(b) Three batteries A, B,and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm (10)
Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them. (10)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
- For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
- Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:
R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:
R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- And the star-to-delta conversion:
R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3
R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1
R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2
- For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
- Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
- Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
- Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.
105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)
- Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)
- At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)
2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)
- From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
- Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500
140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500
2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.
- Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
- Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
- Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
- Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
- Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
- Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.
So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to electronic control systems.
(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control. (8)
(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Temperature Sensor:
- Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.
Transmitter:
- The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).
Comparator:
- The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.
Temperature Controller:
- This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.
Signal Converter:
- This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.
Actuator (or 3-way Valve):
- The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to a 3 speed A.C. cage motor driven cargo winch:
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor. (8)
(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved. (8)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed Change:
The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:
$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$
Where,
Ns = Synchronous speed.
f = Frequency of power supply.
P = number of poles.
Methods to Achieve Speed Change:
Multiple Stator Windings:
- Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.
Consequent Pole Method:
- A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.
Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):
- Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.
Braking Mechanism:
Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.
Plugging:
- Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.
Rheostatic Braking:
- In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.
Regenerative Braking:
- For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
What is a marine high voltage system? Sketch and describe a shipboard high voltage switch board and its protective devices. (16)
Appeared In: Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:
- AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
- DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
- Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.
Features of Marine HV System:
- Neutral is always earthed through a Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) to limit earth fault current.
- HV systems are more expensive than LV systems due to the need for special insulation, protective gear, and safety features.
- They carry a higher arc-flash hazard, necessitating stringent operational and maintenance safety procedures.
- The general layout of an HV system is similar to an LV system, but includes additional protective and safety components.
Ships High Voltage Distribution System:
- 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
- High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
- HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
- High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
- High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
- High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
- Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
- Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.
Protective Devices in Marine HV Systems:
Protective Device | Function |
Overcurrent (Instantaneous) | Trips the breaker immediately on high current to protect equipment. |
OCIT (Overcurrent Inverse Time) | Shortens the trip delay as overcurrent magnitude increases. |
Earth Leakage | Detects small earth faults and trips the system to prevent damage or fire. |
Reverse Power Protection | Prevents motorization of generators by detecting reverse current flow. |
Undervoltage Protection | Trips equipment if the supply voltage drops below safe limits. |
Overtemperature Protection | Used to monitor cable and equipment temperatures to prevent overheating. |
Differential Fault Protection | Compares phase currents (inlet and outlet); trips if imbalance detected. |
Thermal Overload (Thermal O/L) | Trips on excessive current over time to protect insulation and windings. |
Locked Rotor Protection | Detects if a motor rotor is stalled by checking imbalance across phases. |
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 4x
Differentiate between half and full wave rectification. State where half wave rectification may be used and the purpose for which it is not well adapted. Sketch a bridge connection by which full wave rectification may be obtained. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The difference between half wave and full wave rectification:
Half-wave rectification:
- Uses a single diode to allow only one-half of the AC waveform (either the positive or negative half-cycle) to pass through. The other half is blocked.
- Results in a pulsating DC output with a significant amount of ripple (variation in voltage). The average DC voltage is lower compared to the input AC voltage.
- Simpler to implement, requiring only one diode, but less efficient because it wastes half of the input power.
- The average output current is 0.318 times the peak input current. The RMS value is 0.5 times the peak input current.
Half-wave rectification is not well adopted because:
- Less Average current
- Less average RMS
- High pulsation output
- Lower voltage developed
- More ripple as compared to others
- Efficiency is less as compared to others.
Full-wave rectification:
- Uses either two diodes in a centre-tapped transformer configuration or four diodes in a bridge rectifier configuration to utilize both halves of the AC waveform.
- Produces a pulsating DC output with less ripple than half-wave rectification, resulting in a smoother DC output and a higher average DC voltage.
- More efficient as it uses both halves of the input AC waveform.
- Requires more components (two or four diodes), but provides a more efficient and improved DC output. The average output current is 0.6365 times the peak input current, and the RMS value is 0.707 times the peak input current.
Sketch of bridge connection for full wave rectification:
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)
(b) The low-voltage release of an A.C. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohms. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, A.C. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the “full-in” position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the “full-in” position of the plunger. (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)
(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together. Between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.
Specifications of the three batteries are given below: (10)
(i) Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
(ii) Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm
(iii) Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Nov 2024 Jun 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
For a star-connected system:
$$V_{line}=\sqrt3\:V_{phase}$$
$$\frac{V_{line}}{V_{phase}}=\sqrt3\:=\:1.732$$
In a star connection, the line current is equal to the phase current:
$$I_{line}=I_{phase}$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct online start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships.
Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following Problems: (16)
(a) High starting current
(b) Low starting current.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (6)
(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20Ω is to supply power to 1000 load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate:
(i) Peak load current
(ii) DC load current
(iii) AC load current.
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Forward bias characteristics:
- The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
- A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
- After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.
Reverse bias characteristics:
- When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
- For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.
Breakdown characteristics:
- In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).
Dynamic Resistance (Rd):
- This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Static Resistance (Rs):
- This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction; (8)
(b) Describe the operation of the generator arrangement sketched in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The a.c. shaft generator is a synchronous machine that produces alternating current with a frequency that is dictated by variations in engine speed. At the full rated r.p.m., the frequency may match with the electrical system.
The output is supplied to the static converter, which has two main parts:
Rectifier bridge -To convert/change shaft generator output from AC to DC.
Inverter - To change DC back to AC, at the correct frequency.
Alternating current from the shaft generator, when delivered to the 3phase rectifier bridge, passes through the diodes in the forward direction only, as a direct current.
The smoothing reactor reduces ripple. The original frequency (within limits) is unimportant once the supply has been altered to d.c. by the rectifier.
The inverter for transposition of the temporary direct current (d.c.) back to alternating current (a.c.) is a bridge made up of 6 thyristors. Direct current available to the thyristors bridge is blocked unless the thyristors are triggered or fired by a gate signal. Gate signals are controlled to switch each thyristor on in sequence to pass a pulse of current. The pattern of alternate current flow and break constitutes an approximation to a 3-phase alternating current.
Voltage and frequency of inverter supply to the a.c. the system must be kept constant within limits. These characteristics are controlled for a normal alternator by the automatic voltage regulator (AVR) and the governor of the prime mover, respectively. They could be controlled by a shaft alternator inverter by a separate diesel-driven synchronous alternator running in parallel. Benefits can be obtained from a synchronous compensator which does not require a prime mover or driving motor except for starting. The compensator may have its own starter motor or it may be an ordinary alternator with a clutch on the drive shaft from the prime mover.
The diesel prime mover for the compensator is started and used to bring it up to speed for connection to the switchboard. The excitation is then set to give the reactive power, and finally, the clutch is opened, the diesel shut down and the synchronous machine then continues to rotate independently like a synchronous motor, at a speed corresponding to the frequency of the a.c. system.
A synchronous compensator is used with the monitoring and controlling system, to dictate or define the frequency. It also maintains constant a.c. system voltage damps any harmonics and meets the reactive power requirements of the system and converter, as well as supplying in the event of a short circuit the current necessary to operate trips.
The cooling arrangements for static frequency converters include the provision of fans as well as the necessary heat sinks for thyristors.
Due to the many advantages of shaft generator systems, more and more vessels are equipped with them
In summary, some of the greatest benefits include the following:
- Lowering of fuel and lubrication costs
- Reduction of maintenance costs and personnel on board
- Return on investment in 2 to 4 years
- Increased safety for ship and crew
- Low noise power generation
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to Electronic control systems:
(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control; (8)
(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Temperature Sensor:
- Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.
Transmitter:
- The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).
Comparator:
- The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.
Temperature Controller:
- This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.
Signal Converter:
- This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.
Actuator (or 3-way Valve):
- The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) . Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a Silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator. (8)
(b) . Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system. (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.
The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Sketch a graph of starting current, and torque against the speed of rotation for a single cage motor. (6)
(b) A 230V motor, which normally develops 10Kw at 1000 rev/min with an efficiency of 85%, is to be used as a generator. The armature resistance is 0.15 Ohm and the shunt field resistance is 220Ohm. If it is driven at 1080 rev/min and the field current is adjusted to 1.1A by means of the shunt regulator what output in Kw could be expected as a generator, if the armature copper loss was kept down to that when running as a motor. (10)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting current: at standstill (speed = 0) the starting current is high (5 to 8 times full-load current). As the motor accelerates the current falls, and at synchronous speed it would be zero (in practice small no-load current). The current curve falls from a high value at zero speed to a low value near synchronous speed.
- Torque: at standstill the starting torque is moderate (about 1.5 to 2 times full-load torque). As speed increases the torque rises to a maximum (pull-out torque) at a speed corresponding to the slip for maximum torque, then falls to zero at synchronous speed. The torque-speed curve rises from the starting value, peaks, then drops to zero at synchronous speed.
- The two curves are plotted against speed from 0 to synchronous speed.
- As a motor: input power = 10/0.85 = 11.765 kW. Line current = 11765/230 = 51.15 A.
- Shunt field current (motor) = 230/220 = 1.045 A. Armature current (motor) = 51.15 - 1.045 = 50.1 A.
- Armature copper loss (motor) = Ia^2 Ra = 50.1^2 x 0.15 = 2510 x 0.15 = 376.5 W.
- Back e.m.f. (motor) E = V - Ia Ra = 230 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 230 - 7.5 = 222.5 V.
- As a generator driven at 1080 rev/min with field current 1.1 A:
- E.m.f. is proportional to speed and flux. Flux is proportional to field current (assumed linear). E_g = E_m x (1080/1000) x (1.1/1.045) = 222.5 x 1.08 x 1.0526 = 252.9 V.
- Armature copper loss kept the same as when running as a motor (376.5 W): Ia^2 x 0.15 = 376.5, so Ia = sqrt(376.5/0.15) = sqrt(2510) = 50.1 A.
- Terminal voltage of generator V = E_g - Ia Ra = 252.9 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 252.9 - 7.5 = 245.4 V.
- Load current = Ia - field current = 50.1 - 1.1 = 49.0 A.
- Output power = V x I_load = 245.4 x 49.0 = 12.02 kW.
So the expected generator output is about 12 kW.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x
Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuits (16)
(a) Rectifier circuit
(b) Amplifier circuit
(c) Oscillator circuit
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Rectifier Circuit
- Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
- Input: AC signal.
- Output: DC signal.
- Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
- Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
- Feedback: No feedback involved.
- Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.
The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.
(b) Amplifier Circuit
- Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
- Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
- Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
- Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
- Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
- Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
- Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.
This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.
(c) Oscillator Circuit
- Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
- Input: DC supply.
- Output: AC signal.
- Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
- Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
- Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
- Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/ship diagrams. (16)
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.
Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.
For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.
Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.
The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Sketch a magnetic overload device incorporating a dashpot and explain how the current and time setting of the device may be varied. (8)
(b) With the aid of a sketch, outline the essential feature of a three stage "Preferential tripping" scheme for the main generators of a ship. (8)
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Preferential trips operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.
When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows
First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):
- Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
- Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
- Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load
Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
- Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high
Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
- Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.
Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):
- Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
- This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.
Main Breaker Trip
- If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.
Overload Protection and Alarms
- Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)
(a) What is back emf? Derive the relation for the back emf and the supplied voltage in terms of armature resistance. (6)
(b) An 8kw, 230V, 1200 rpm d.c shunt motor has Ra = 0.7W. The field current is adjusted until, on no-load with a supply of 250V, the motor runs at 1250 rpm and draws armature current of 1.6 amps. A load torque is then applied to the motor shaft which causes it to raise to 40 A and the speed falls to 1150 rpm.Determine the reduction in the flux per pole due to the armature reaction. (10)
Appeared In: Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Consider a shunt motor:
$$V\:=\:Applied\:voltage$$
$$I\:=\:Current\:flowing\:through\:the\:circuit$$
$$R_{a}\:=\:Armature\:resistance$$
$$R_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:resistance$$
$$I_{sh}\:=\:Shunt\:field\:current$$
$$E_{b}\:=\:Back\:EMF$$
$$Net\:voltage\:across\:Armature\:=\:V-E_{b}$$
$$Current\:=\:\frac{V}{R}$$
$$Therefore,\:I_{a}\:=\:\frac{V-E_{B}}{R_{a}}$$
$$I_{a}R_{a}\:=\:V-E_{b}$$
$$E_{b}\:=\:V-I_{a}R_{a}$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.
(b) Describe the operation of the generator arrangement sketched in (a).
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The a.c. shaft generator is a synchronous machine that produces alternating current with a frequency that is dictated by variations in engine speed. At the full rated r.p.m., the frequency may match with the electrical system.
The output is supplied to the static converter, which has two main parts:
Rectifier bridge -To convert/change shaft generator output from AC to DC.
Inverter - To change DC back to AC, at the correct frequency.
Alternating current from the shaft generator, when delivered to the 3phase rectifier bridge, passes through the diodes in the forward direction only, as a direct current.
The smoothing reactor reduces ripple. The original frequency (within limits) is unimportant once the supply has been altered to d.c. by the rectifier.
The inverter for transposition of the temporary direct current (d.c.) back to alternating current (a.c.) is a bridge made up of 6 thyristors. Direct current available to the thyristors bridge is blocked unless the thyristors are triggered or fired by a gate signal. Gate signals are controlled to switch each thyristor on in sequence to pass a pulse of current. The pattern of alternate current flow and break constitutes an approximation to a 3-phase alternating current.
Voltage and frequency of inverter supply to the a.c. the system must be kept constant within limits. These characteristics are controlled for a normal alternator by the automatic voltage regulator (AVR) and the governor of the prime mover, respectively. They could be controlled by a shaft alternator inverter by a separate diesel-driven synchronous alternator running in parallel. Benefits can be obtained from a synchronous compensator which does not require a prime mover or driving motor except for starting. The compensator may have its own starter motor or it may be an ordinary alternator with a clutch on the drive shaft from the prime mover.
The diesel prime mover for the compensator is started and used to bring it up to speed for connection to the switchboard. The excitation is then set to give the reactive power, and finally, the clutch is opened, the diesel shut down and the synchronous machine then continues to rotate independently like a synchronous motor, at a speed corresponding to the frequency of the a.c. system.
A synchronous compensator is used with the monitoring and controlling system, to dictate or define the frequency. It also maintains constant a.c. system voltage damps any harmonics and meets the reactive power requirements of the system and converter, as well as supplying in the event of a short circuit the current necessary to operate trips.
The cooling arrangements for static frequency converters include the provision of fans as well as the necessary heat sinks for thyristors.
Due to the many advantages of shaft generator systems, more and more vessels are equipped with them
In summary, some of the greatest benefits include the following:
- Lowering of fuel and lubrication costs
- Reduction of maintenance costs and personnel on board
- Return on investment in 2 to 4 years
- Increased safety for ship and crew
- Low noise power generation
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to testing High Voltage equipment:
(a) Explain why earthing down is considered essential.
(d) Briefly describe the procedures of earthing down
(c) Describe how an insulation resistance test is carried out on High Voltage equipment, making reference to personnel safety
(d) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a method to detect earth leakage in EACH of the following systems:
(i) Earthed
(ii) Insulated
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- In this system, the generator star point is connected directly to the ship’s hull.
- Any earth leakage current will therefore complete a circuit back to the generator.
- A Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) is fitted to limit the earth fault current to about 5 Amps.
- This limited current is detected using a Current Transformer (CT), as illustrated in the sketch.
- The CT output is then connected to protection and alarm systems to indicate the fault.
(ii) Insulated Neutral System:
- An instrument is used which injects a DC voltage into the busbars through a resistor (R1) and a diode.
- No earth leakage condition:
- No return path exists, hence no current flows through the circuit.
- Voltage on both sides of R1 remains equal.
- The Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp) detects no potential difference (PD), so the output remains zero.
- Earth leakage condition (resistance Re):
- A return path is created through the ship’s hull.
- Current now flows through R1, causing a voltage drop across it.
- The Op-Amp detects a PD: one terminal sees full voltage while the other sees reduced voltage.
- This imbalance causes the Op-Amp to send a signal to the meter/alarm system.
- The magnitude of earth leakage determines the current flow and the PD across R1, allowing fault severity to be measured.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to electronic control systems:
(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control
(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a).
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Temperature Sensor:
- Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.
Transmitter:
- The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).
Comparator:
- The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.
Temperature Controller:
- This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.
Signal Converter:
- This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.
Actuator (or 3-way Valve):
- The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
Derive the expression for current and voltage relations between line and phase values in the star and delta cases. Draw vector diagram.
Appeared In: Jan 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Derivation of line and phase relations in star and delta:
Star connection:
- The three phase windings have one end of each connected to a common neutral point; the other ends form the three line terminals.
- Line current = phase current: IL = Iph (the same current flows through the winding and the line).
- Line voltage: the line voltage is the phasor difference of two phase voltages, which are 120 degrees apart. By phasor addition, VL = root 3 x Vph.
- Vector diagram: three phase voltages VRN, VYN, VBN at 120 degrees; the line voltage VRY is the phasor sum of VRN and (-VYN), equal to root 3 Vph and leading the phase voltage by 30 degrees.
Delta connection:
- The three windings are connected end to end to form a closed loop, the junctions forming the three line terminals.
- Line voltage = phase voltage: VL = Vph (each winding is directly across two lines).
- Line current: the line current is the phasor difference of two phase currents, giving IL = root 3 x Iph.
- Vector diagram: three phase currents at 120 degrees; the line current is root 3 times the phase current and lags the phase current by 30 degrees.
- Power in both cases: P = root 3 x VL x IL x cos phi.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)
(ii) How is a direct connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced by 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.
(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.
The arrangement ensures stable performance with:
- Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
- Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct online start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on A.C. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following Problems:
(a) High starting current
(b) Low starting current (16)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (6)
(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 is to supply power to 1000 load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (10)
(i) peak load current
(ii) DC load current
(iii) AC load current
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Forward bias characteristics:
- The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
- A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
- After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.
Reverse bias characteristics:
- When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
- For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.
Breakdown characteristics:
- In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).
Dynamic Resistance (Rd):
- This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Static Resistance (Rs):
- This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x
Explain the methods used to control the speed of a 3 Phase induction motors. Draw and Explain a Variable Frequency Drive used for optimization of energy efficiency of auxiliary machineries on board vessels. (16)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Methods used to control the speed of a 3-phase induction motor:
- Pole changing: by reconnecting the stator winding (Dahlander or consequent-pole connection) the number of poles is changed, giving discrete synchronous speeds (N = 120 f/P). Simple and efficient but only a few fixed speeds.
- Rotor resistance (slip-ring motors): inserting resistance in the rotor circuit increases the slip and reduces the speed. Simple but inefficient (slip power is lost as heat) and gives poor speed regulation.
- Variable voltage: reducing the stator voltage increases the slip and reduces the speed, but the torque is also reduced and the method is inefficient and gives poor regulation.
- Variable frequency (VFD): varying the supply frequency changes the synchronous speed. This is the most efficient and gives smooth, continuous speed control over a wide range. The voltage is varied in proportion to the frequency (V/f constant) to maintain constant flux and torque.
- Cascade and Scherbius/Kramer systems: used for large motors to recover slip power and give a few efficient speeds.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) for energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery:
- A VFD consists of three main stages:
- Rectifier: converts the a.c. supply to d.c. (a diode or thyristor bridge).
- D.C. link: a capacitor (and inductor) smooths the d.c. voltage.
- Inverter: converts the d.c. back to a.c. at a variable frequency and voltage using IGBTs switched by pulse-width modulation (PWM).
- The control unit varies the output frequency and voltage (maintaining a constant V/f ratio) to control the motor speed.
- Operation: the VFD supplies the motor with a variable-frequency, variable-voltage supply. By controlling the frequency, the synchronous speed and hence the motor speed are controlled. The V/f ratio is kept constant so the air-gap flux and torque capability are maintained. The motor runs at low slip at each speed, so the efficiency is high.
- Energy efficiency: for auxiliary machinery such as pumps, fans and compressors, the load power varies with the cube of the speed (for fans and pumps). By reducing the speed with a VFD instead of throttling or using a fixed speed, the power consumption is greatly reduced. The VFD matches the motor speed to the actual demand, saving energy, reducing wear, and giving soft starting (reduced starting current and mechanical shock). This is why VFDs are widely used to optimise the energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery on board vessels.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
What is the meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labeling all the important parts. Explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator. (16)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.
In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.
A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.
- Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
- Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
- Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
- Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
- Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
(a) What is the operational impedance of an R.C. Circuit? Describe its usefulness. (6)
(b) A ring-main, 900m long is supplied at a point A at a p.d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in the some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main, if the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest?
Appeared In: Nov 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The operational impedance of an R.C. circuit is the total opposition to current, combining the resistance R and the capacitive reactance XC = 1/(2 pi f C). For a series R-C circuit, Z = R - j XC, with magnitude |Z| = sqrt(R^2 + XC^2) and phase angle phi = atan(XC/R) (current leading voltage).
- Usefulness: it determines the current and phase angle in the circuit for a given voltage and frequency, and hence the power (P = V I cos phi). It is used to design filters, timing circuits, coupling circuits, and to analyse the behaviour of circuits containing capacitors. The impedance shows how the circuit responds to frequency (a capacitor blocks d.c. and passes high frequencies).
- Resistance per metre = 0.00025 ohm/m.
- Segment resistances: A-B = 0.06 ohm; B-C = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing) = 0.08 ohm.
- Let x = current from A towards B, y = current from A the other way to C. x + y = 123 A.
- Current in A-B = x; in B-C = x - 45; in short path A-C = y.
- Loop equation: 0.06 x + 0.085(x - 45) = 0.08 y.
0.145 x - 3.825 = 0.08(123 - x) -> 0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.
- y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
- Voltage at B: 220 - 0.06 x 60.73 = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
- Voltage at C: 220 - 0.08 x 62.27 = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
- The lowest voltage is at C: 215.0 V.
So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage is about 215 V at load C.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to squirrel cage, induction, electric motors.
(a) Describe the construction of such a motor. (6)
(b) Sketch the torque against speed curve of such a motor (6)
(c) Describe a method employed by a retrofitted device used to improve the part load perormance of an induction motor. (4)
Appeared In: Oct 2025 Sep 2023 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Construction of a Squirrel Cage Induction Motor
A squirrel cage induction motor is a robust and reliable AC motor in which the rotor resembles a squirrel cage, giving the motor its name.
Main Components
1. Stator (Stationary Part)
- Composed of a laminated steel core enclosed within a rigid frame.
- The core contains slots that house the three-phase stator windings.
- When connected to a three-phase supply, these windings produce a rotating magnetic field (RMF).
2. Rotor (Rotating Part)
- Constructed from a laminated steel core with aluminium or copper conductor bars placed in longitudinal slots.
- These rotor bars are short-circuited at both ends by end rings, forming a closed “squirrel cage” structure.
- There is no external electrical connection to the rotor.
3. Air Gap
- A small uniform clearance between the stator and the rotor.
- Allows free rotation of the rotor while minimizing magnetic losses.
4. Shaft and Bearings
- The rotor assembly is mounted on a central shaft.
- The shaft is supported by ball or roller bearings for smooth rotation.
5. End Shields and Cooling System
- End shields enclose the motor and support the bearing housings.
- An external or shaft-mounted cooling fan forces air over the motor’s external cooling fins to dissipate heat.
Characteristics
- Simple and rugged construction.
- Low maintenance requirements due to the absence of brushes or slip rings.
- Fixed rotor resistance, giving relatively fixed-speed operating characteristics.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to a 3 speed a.c. cage motor driven cargo winch:
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor. (8)
(b) Describe how speed changes and brakine are achieved. (8)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed Change:
The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:
$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$
Where,
Ns = Synchronous speed.
f = Frequency of power supply.
P = number of poles.
Methods to Achieve Speed Change:
Multiple Stator Windings:
- Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.
Consequent Pole Method:
- A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.
Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):
- Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.
Braking Mechanism:
Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.
Plugging:
- Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.
Rheostatic Braking:
- In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.
Regenerative Braking:
- For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Sketch a graph of starting current and torque against speed of rotation for a single cage motor (6)
(b) A 230V motor, which normally develops 10kW at 1000 rev/min with an efficiency of 85 percent, is to be used as a generator. The armature resistance is 0.15 ohm and the shunt feild resistance is 220 ohm. If it is driven at 1080 rev/min and the field current is adjusted to 1.1A, by means of the shunt regulator, what output in kW could be expected as a generator, if The armature copper loss was kept down to that when running as a motor (10)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Sep 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting current: at standstill (speed = 0) the starting current is high (5 to 8 times full-load current). As the motor accelerates the current falls, and at synchronous speed it would be zero (in practice small no-load current). The current curve falls from a high value at zero speed to a low value near synchronous speed.
- Torque: at standstill the starting torque is moderate (about 1.5 to 2 times full-load torque). As speed increases the torque rises to a maximum (pull-out torque) at a speed corresponding to the slip for maximum torque, then falls to zero at synchronous speed. The torque-speed curve rises from the starting value, peaks, then drops to zero at synchronous speed.
- The two curves are plotted against speed from 0 to synchronous speed.
- As a motor: input power = 10/0.85 = 11.765 kW. Line current = 11765/230 = 51.15 A.
- Shunt field current (motor) = 230/220 = 1.045 A. Armature current (motor) = 51.15 - 1.045 = 50.1 A.
- Armature copper loss (motor) = Ia^2 Ra = 50.1^2 x 0.15 = 2510 x 0.15 = 376.5 W.
- Back e.m.f. (motor) E = V - Ia Ra = 230 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 230 - 7.5 = 222.5 V.
- As a generator driven at 1080 rev/min with field current 1.1 A:
- E.m.f. is proportional to speed and flux. Flux is proportional to field current (assumed linear). E_g = E_m x (1080/1000) x (1.1/1.045) = 222.5 x 1.08 x 1.0526 = 252.9 V.
- Armature copper loss kept the same as when running as a motor (376.5 W): Ia^2 x 0.15 = 376.5, so Ia = sqrt(376.5/0.15) = sqrt(2510) = 50.1 A.
- Terminal voltage of generator V = E_g - Ia Ra = 252.9 - 50.1 x 0.15 = 252.9 - 7.5 = 245.4 V.
- Load current = Ia - field current = 50.1 - 1.1 = 49.0 A.
- Output power = V x I_load = 245.4 x 49.0 = 12.02 kW.
So the expected generator output is about 12 kW.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection to alternators intended for operation.
(b) (i) Sketch a reverse power trip.
(ii) Briefly explain the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse power protection is essential to safeguard alternators in parallel operation from the adverse effects of reverse power flow. When the prime mover of an alternator fails to provide sufficient torque, the alternator starts acting as a motor and draws power from the busbar—a condition known as the motoring effect. This situation can cause significant damage to the prime mover, as it may overspeed due to the additional energy supplied by the alternator. Such overspeed can lead to mechanical failures, including damaged shafts and broken turbine blades.
Furthermore, the reverse power effect imposes additional loads on other alternators in the system. These alternators may overload and trip due to excessive power demands, potentially leading to a blackout that compromises the safety and operational reliability of the vessel. The alternator subjected to reverse power may also lose its residual magnetism, impairing its ability to generate power effectively when restored.
To mitigate these risks, a reverse power relay is installed. This relay monitors the direction of power flow and trips the circuit breaker if reverse power exceeds a preset threshold (typically 10% of full load). The relay incorporates a time delay to prevent tripping due to transient conditions during synchronization or other short-term disturbances.
(ii) Principle of operation and tripping activation
The reverse power relay operates on the principle of detecting the direction of power flow using the interaction of magnetic fields. The voltage coil generates a magnetic field lagging the voltage by approximately 90°, while the current coil produces a magnetic field proportional to the load current. Both fields interact with the aluminum disc, inducing eddy currents that create a torque.
During normal power flow, the torque rotates the disc in one direction, keeping the trip contacts open. When power reverses, the direction of the torque changes, causing the disc to rotate in the opposite direction. This rotation closes the trip contacts, activating the breaker trip circuit and disconnecting the alternator.
A time delay (typically 5 seconds) prevents the breaker from tripping due to transient power surges during synchronization. Reverse power settings range from 2–6% for turbine-driven alternators and 8–15% for diesel-driven alternators, accounting for the differences in prime mover characteristics.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
With the aid of sketch describe the main features and principle of operation of a D.C. moving coil meter. If such a meter is designed to give full scale deflection with 150 m, State how it may be adapted:
(i) As an ammeter to read up to 150
(ii) As a voltmeter to read up to 150 V
No calculations are required
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
D.C. moving coil meter - main features and principle of operation:
- Construction: a permanent magnet with soft-iron pole pieces and a cylindrical soft-iron core creates a uniform radial magnetic field in the air gap. A rectangular coil of fine wire is wound on a light aluminium former and pivoted so it can rotate in the air gap. The coil is mounted on jewel bearings. A hairspring provides the controlling (restoring) torque and also carries the current to the coil. A pointer attached to the coil moves over a calibrated scale. A counterweight balances the pointer.
- Principle: when current flows through the coil, the coil sides in the magnetic field experience a force (F = B I l) producing a deflecting torque proportional to the current (T = B A N I, where A is the coil area, N the number of turns). This torque is opposed by the spring torque (proportional to the angle of deflection). At equilibrium the deflection is proportional to the current, giving a linear (uniform) scale. The damping is provided by eddy currents induced in the aluminium former.
- The meter measures d.c. only (the direction of deflection depends on current direction). It is accurate and sensitive.
Adaptation of a meter giving full-scale deflection with 150 mA (the question states 150 m, i.e. 150 mA):
- A low-resistance shunt is connected in parallel with the meter coil. The shunt carries the bulk of the current (150 A - 150 mA), while only 150 mA passes through the meter. The shunt resistance is chosen so that 150 mA flows through the meter when 150 A flows in the circuit. The shunt is made of a material with a low temperature coefficient (e.g. manganin) and is connected with short, heavy leads. The scale is recalibrated to read up to 150 A.
- A high resistance (multiplier) is connected in series with the meter coil. The series resistance is chosen so that the full-scale current of 150 mA flows when 150 V is applied across the combination. The meter then reads the voltage. The scale is recalibrated to read up to 150 V.
(No calculations required.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to preferential tripping in a marine electrical distribution system:
(a) State why this facility is required.
(b) With the aid of a sketch, describe a typical arrangement to provide three stages of tripping an Instantaneous protection against short circuit
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- In marine electrical systems, continuous power supply to the switchboard is essential to maintain vessel safety. A blackout resulting from the tripping of the alternator breaker can compromise the vessel’s operation and safety.
- The preferential tripping system ensures that the alternator breaker only trips instantly in the event of a severe fault like a short circuit.
- For less severe overcurrent conditions (e.g., 110% of full load), time-delayed relays perform preferential tripping by shedding non-essential loads such as galley equipment, air conditioning, and ventilation fans.
- By reducing the alternator's load incrementally, the system prevents the main breaker from tripping unnecessarily and avoids a complete power blackout, ensuring essential systems remain powered.
operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.
When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows
First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):
- Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
- Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
- Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load
Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
- Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high
Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
- Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.
Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):
- Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
- This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.
Main Breaker Trip
- If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.
Overload Protection and Alarms
- Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier, If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor?
(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The Forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
- Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
- The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
- The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
- For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
- The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
- The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)
(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)
(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm,
Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them. (10)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
- For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
- Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:
R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:
R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- And the star-to-delta conversion:
R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3
R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1
R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2
- For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
- Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
- Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
- Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.
105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)
- Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)
- At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)
2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)
- From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
- Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500
140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500
2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.
- Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
- Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
- Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
- Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
- Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
- Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.
So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to a 3-phase AC cage motor driven cargo winch:
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor
(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed Change:
The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:
$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$
Where,
Ns = Synchronous speed.
f = Frequency of power supply.
P = number of poles.
Methods to Achieve Speed Change:
Multiple Stator Windings:
- Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.
Consequent Pole Method:
- A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.
Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):
- Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.
Braking Mechanism:
Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.
Plugging:
- Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.
Rheostatic Braking:
- In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.
Regenerative Braking:
- For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram, illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor (6)
(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0A.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
- Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
- The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
- The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
- For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
- The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
- The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation:
(i) Shunt motor
(ii) Series motor
(iii) Cumulative compound motor
Explain (6)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes a armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7 ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced by 20 percent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final steady-state conditons (10)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:
$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$
Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.
Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.
Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.
(b) Describe the operation of the generator arrangement sketched in (a).
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The a.c. shaft generator is a synchronous machine that produces alternating current with a frequency that is dictated by variations in engine speed. At the full rated r.p.m., the frequency may match with the electrical system.
The output is supplied to the static converter, which has two main parts:
Rectifier bridge -To convert/change shaft generator output from AC to DC.
Inverter - To change DC back to AC, at the correct frequency.
Alternating current from the shaft generator, when delivered to the 3phase rectifier bridge, passes through the diodes in the forward direction only, as a direct current.
The smoothing reactor reduces ripple. The original frequency (within limits) is unimportant once the supply has been altered to d.c. by the rectifier.
The inverter for transposition of the temporary direct current (d.c.) back to alternating current (a.c.) is a bridge made up of 6 thyristors. Direct current available to the thyristors bridge is blocked unless the thyristors are triggered or fired by a gate signal. Gate signals are controlled to switch each thyristor on in sequence to pass a pulse of current. The pattern of alternate current flow and break constitutes an approximation to a 3-phase alternating current.
Voltage and frequency of inverter supply to the a.c. the system must be kept constant within limits. These characteristics are controlled for a normal alternator by the automatic voltage regulator (AVR) and the governor of the prime mover, respectively. They could be controlled by a shaft alternator inverter by a separate diesel-driven synchronous alternator running in parallel. Benefits can be obtained from a synchronous compensator which does not require a prime mover or driving motor except for starting. The compensator may have its own starter motor or it may be an ordinary alternator with a clutch on the drive shaft from the prime mover.
The diesel prime mover for the compensator is started and used to bring it up to speed for connection to the switchboard. The excitation is then set to give the reactive power, and finally, the clutch is opened, the diesel shut down and the synchronous machine then continues to rotate independently like a synchronous motor, at a speed corresponding to the frequency of the a.c. system.
A synchronous compensator is used with the monitoring and controlling system, to dictate or define the frequency. It also maintains constant a.c. system voltage damps any harmonics and meets the reactive power requirements of the system and converter, as well as supplying in the event of a short circuit the current necessary to operate trips.
The cooling arrangements for static frequency converters include the provision of fans as well as the necessary heat sinks for thyristors.
Due to the many advantages of shaft generator systems, more and more vessels are equipped with them
In summary, some of the greatest benefits include the following:
- Lowering of fuel and lubrication costs
- Reduction of maintenance costs and personnel on board
- Return on investment in 2 to 4 years
- Increased safety for ship and crew
- Low noise power generation
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 3x
with reference to testing High Voltage equipment:
(a) Explain why earthing down is considered essential
(b) Briefly describe the procedures of earthing down
(c) Describe how an insulation resistance test is carried out on High Voltage equipment, making
reference to personnel safety
(d) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a method to detect earth leakage in EACH of the following systems:
(i) Earthed
(ii) Insulated
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- In this system, the generator star point is connected directly to the ship’s hull.
- Any earth leakage current will therefore complete a circuit back to the generator.
- A Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) is fitted to limit the earth fault current to about 5 Amps.
- This limited current is detected using a Current Transformer (CT), as illustrated in the sketch.
- The CT output is then connected to protection and alarm systems to indicate the fault.
(ii) Insulated Neutral System:
- An instrument is used which injects a DC voltage into the busbars through a resistor (R1) and a diode.
- No earth leakage condition:
- No return path exists, hence no current flows through the circuit.
- Voltage on both sides of R1 remains equal.
- The Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp) detects no potential difference (PD), so the output remains zero.
- Earth leakage condition (resistance Re):
- A return path is created through the ship’s hull.
- Current now flows through R1, causing a voltage drop across it.
- The Op-Amp detects a PD: one terminal sees full voltage while the other sees reduced voltage.
- This imbalance causes the Op-Amp to send a signal to the meter/alarm system.
- The magnitude of earth leakage determines the current flow and the PD across R1, allowing fault severity to be measured.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to electronic control systems:
(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a).
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Temperature Sensor:
- Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.
Transmitter:
- The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).
Comparator:
- The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.
Temperature Controller:
- This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.
Signal Converter:
- This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.
Actuator (or 3-way Valve):
- The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
(a) Derive the expression for current and voltage relations between line and phase values in the star and delta cases. Draw vector diagram. (6)
(b) Three impedances Z = 5 + j4 are connected in the form of a delta to the three loads of a balanced 3-phase circuit. The line voltage is 120 volts. Find (10)
(i) The phase current
(ii) Power factor
(iii) The volt-ampere in the circuit.
Appeared In: Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Given:
$$\operatorname{Impedance}\:\left(Z\right)=5+j4\:=\:\sqrt{5^2+4^2}$$
$$Voltage\left(V\right)=120V$$
Circuit is connected in Delta, so voltage is same.
$$V_{L}=V_{phase}$$
(i) The phase current:
$$I_{L}=\sqrt3\times I_{ph}$$
$$V=IR$$
$$I_{ph}=\frac{V_{L}}{Z}$$
$$I_{ph}=\frac{120}{\sqrt{5^2}+4^2}$$
$$I_{ph}=\frac{120}{6.4}$$
$$I_{ph}=18.75A$$
(ii) Power factor:
$$\cos\phi=\frac{R}{Z}$$
$$\cos\phi=\frac{5}{6.4}$$
$$\cos\phi=0.78$$
(iii) The volt-ampere in the circuit:
$$=V_{ph}\times I_{ph}$$
$$=120\times18.75$$
$$=2250V$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) (i) What is direct-connected alternator? (3)
(ii) How is a direct-connected exciter arranged in an alternator? (3)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 percent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transion from intal to final, Steady-state conditions. (10)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jan 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
is an alternator that is directly coupled (without any intermediate gearing mechanisms like belts or chains) to its driving source, such as a diesel engine. This integration allows the alternator to be mounted directly on the extension shaft of the engine. Such alternators are typically used in portable engine-driven applications and are generally small in size, with power ratings ranging from 1 to 1.75 kW. These systems are often air-cooled and compact, making them suitable for mobile and low-power setups.
(ii) In a direct-connected alternator, the stator (or armature winding) may be either single-phase or three-phase with distributed winding. The rotor (field winding) is typically a silent pole design, often using permanent magnets for field excitation.
The arrangement ensures stable performance with:
- Voltage variations within ±5% from no-load to full-load conditions.
- Frequency variation limited to ±1% of its rated value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x
Explain the methods used to control the speed of a 3 Phase induction motors. Draw and Explain a Variable Frequency Drive used for optimization of energy efficiency of auxilary machineries on board vessels.
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Methods used to control the speed of a 3-phase induction motor:
- Pole changing: by reconnecting the stator winding (Dahlander or consequent-pole connection) the number of poles is changed, giving discrete synchronous speeds (N = 120 f/P). Simple and efficient but only a few fixed speeds.
- Rotor resistance (slip-ring motors): inserting resistance in the rotor circuit increases the slip and reduces the speed. Simple but inefficient (slip power is lost as heat) and gives poor speed regulation.
- Variable voltage: reducing the stator voltage increases the slip and reduces the speed, but the torque is also reduced and the method is inefficient and gives poor regulation.
- Variable frequency (VFD): varying the supply frequency changes the synchronous speed. This is the most efficient and gives smooth, continuous speed control over a wide range. The voltage is varied in proportion to the frequency (V/f constant) to maintain constant flux and torque.
- Cascade and Scherbius/Kramer systems: used for large motors to recover slip power and give a few efficient speeds.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) for energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery:
- A VFD consists of three main stages:
- Rectifier: converts the a.c. supply to d.c. (a diode or thyristor bridge).
- D.C. link: a capacitor (and inductor) smooths the d.c. voltage.
- Inverter: converts the d.c. back to a.c. at a variable frequency and voltage using IGBTs switched by pulse-width modulation (PWM).
- The control unit varies the output frequency and voltage (maintaining a constant V/f ratio) to control the motor speed.
- Operation: the VFD supplies the motor with a variable-frequency, variable-voltage supply. By controlling the frequency, the synchronous speed and hence the motor speed are controlled. The V/f ratio is kept constant so the air-gap flux and torque capability are maintained. The motor runs at low slip at each speed, so the efficiency is high.
- Energy efficiency: for auxiliary machinery such as pumps, fans and compressors, the load power varies with the cube of the speed (for fans and pumps). By reducing the speed with a VFD instead of throttling or using a fixed speed, the power consumption is greatly reduced. The VFD matches the motor speed to the actual demand, saving energy, reducing wear, and giving soft starting (reduced starting current and mechanical shock). This is why VFDs are widely used to optimise the energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery on board vessels.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x
Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.
(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.
(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant.
Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Economic Reasons
- Diesel-electric systems allow for optimal fuel utilization even at low loads, ensuring cost-effectiveness during operations.
- They maintain high efficiency regardless of the engine's speed, making them suitable for variable operating conditions.
- The reduced complexity of the propulsion machinery leads to lower maintenance requirements and costs.
- The reduction in propulsion machinery size frees up more space for other uses, such as cargo storage or additional amenities.
- The system minimizes the likelihood of a complete loss of propulsion power, ensuring uninterrupted vessel operation.
Environmental Reasons
- Diesel-electric systems produce fewer emissions compared to traditional propulsion systems, contributing to reduced environmental impact and compliance with stricter emission regulations.
Operational Convenience
- These systems provide excellent responsiveness from zero to maximum speed, making them highly adaptable to dynamic operating conditions.
- Diesel-electric propulsion allows for shorter reversing times, improving manoeuvrability.
- They ensure quiet operation, enhancing onboard comfort for passengers and crew.
- Minimal mechanical vibrations lead to a smoother and more comfortable sailing experience.
Flexibility
- The mechanical requirements of the shaft system are less complex, allowing for easier installation and maintenance.
- The design and engineering of the propeller are not constrained by the diesel engine, providing greater flexibility in system design.
- Operators can select from a wider range of diesel engines based on their specific operational needs and preferences.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to preferential tripping in a marine electrical distribution system:
(a) With the aid of a sketch, describe a typical arrangement to provide three stages of tripping an instantaneous protection against short circuit.
(b) State why this protection is required.
Appeared In: Jul 2022 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Preferential trips operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.
When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows
First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):
- Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
- Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
- Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load
Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
- Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high
Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
- Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.
Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):
- Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
- This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.
Main Breaker Trip
- If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.
Overload Protection and Alarms
- Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
- In marine electrical systems, continuous power supply to the switchboard is essential to maintain vessel safety. A blackout resulting from the tripping of the alternator breaker can compromise the vessel’s operation and safety.
- The preferential tripping system ensures that the alternator breaker only trips instantly in the event of a severe fault like a short circuit.
- For less severe overcurrent conditions (e.g., 110% of full load), time-delayed relays perform preferential tripping by shedding non-essential loads such as galley equipment, air conditioning, and ventilation fans.
- By reducing the alternator's load incrementally, the system prevents the main breaker from tripping unnecessarily and avoids a complete power blackout, ensuring essential systems remain powered.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (6)
(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (10)
(i) Peak load current,
(ii) DC load current.
(iii) AC load current.
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Forward bias characteristics:
- The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
- A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
- After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.
Reverse bias characteristics:
- When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
- For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.
Breakdown characteristics:
- In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).
Dynamic Resistance (Rd):
- This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Static Resistance (Rs):
- This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to the provision of a shore electrical supply to a ship:
(a) Sketch an arrangement for taking A.C. shore supply and checks to be carried out prior taking shore connection (10)
(b) Describe the method of safely connecting the arrangement sketched in (a) to the shore supply. (6)
Appeared In: Feb 2021 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A visual inspection should be done to identify any visible damage to the shore power cable, such as cuts, fraying, or signs of overheating.
- Measure the insulation resistance of the shore cable and the ship’s shore connection box to ensure proper insulation.
- Verify the working condition of fuses by performing a continuity test.
- Confirm the functionality of indication lamps for clear status monitoring.
- Ensure that the shore supply circuit breaker is switched off before any connections are made.
- Confirm that the emergency generator is set to manual mode to avoid unintentional operation during shore supply connection.
- Inspect the connecting terminals on both the shore connection box and the cable lugs to ensure they are clean, secure, and free from corrosion.
- Turn off all non-essential equipment to minimize load requirements.
- Keep standby diesel generators in manual mode to prevent automatic starting.
- Announce a potential blackout to notify the crew and prepare them for any temporary power loss.
- Keep a hand safety torch readily available to handle temporary darkness during the transition.
- Shut off the ship's power and alternator.
- Connections of shore cables are to be made only after shutting off the ship's power & alternator.
- Connect the ship’s hull to the shore earth point to provide proper grounding and ensure safety from electrical faults.
- Connect the shore supply cables to the circuit breaker and measure the voltage and frequency of the shore supply to confirm compatibility with the ship's electrical system.
- Verify the phase sequence using the Phase Sequence indicator to avoid incorrect motor rotation or electrical malfunction.
- Ensure that all lids and circuit breakers are switched off before finalizing connections.
- Once all conditions are satisfied, switch on the shore supply circuit breaker.
- Start one motor and confirm the correct direction of rotation to validate the phase sequence.
- Begin connecting essential systems and equipment to the shore supply one at a time. Monitor the load to ensure it does not exceed the shore supply capacity.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (6)
(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (5)
(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed. (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.
On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.
By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.
In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.
Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
What is the meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labeling all the important parts, explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator. (16)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.
In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.
A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.
- Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
- Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
- Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
- Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
- Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Explain the effect of making incorrect phase and starter connections. (6)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0. 7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 percent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions. (10)
Appeared In: Feb 2021 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Incorrect Phase Connections:
- Reversing any two phases in a three-phase motor will reverse its rotation direction.
- Incorrect phase connections can result in an unbalanced power supply, leading to uneven current distribution across the motor windings.
- Motors may run noisily, vibrate excessively, or operate at reduced performance levels.
Incorrect Starter Connections:
- Star-delta starters are commonly used to reduce starting current. Incorrect wiring can prevent the motor from transitioning from star to delta connection, or prevent motor from starting.
- Incorrect starter connections can cause the motor to draw excessive current, leading to overheating.
- Continuous operation under incorrect starter conditions can stress the motor components, leading to premature failure.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator. Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system.
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.
The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection for alternators intended for operation.
(a) Sketch a reverse power trip.
(b) Explain briefly the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated.
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018 Oct 2020
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse power protection is essential to safeguard alternators in parallel operation from the adverse effects of reverse power flow. When the prime mover of an alternator fails to provide sufficient torque, the alternator starts acting as a motor and draws power from the busbar—a condition known as the motoring effect. This situation can cause significant damage to the prime mover, as it may overspeed due to the additional energy supplied by the alternator. Such overspeed can lead to mechanical failures, including damaged shafts and broken turbine blades.
Furthermore, the reverse power effect imposes additional loads on other alternators in the system. These alternators may overload and trip due to excessive power demands, potentially leading to a blackout that compromises the safety and operational reliability of the vessel. The alternator subjected to reverse power may also lose its residual magnetism, impairing its ability to generate power effectively when restored.
To mitigate these risks, a reverse power relay is installed. This relay monitors the direction of power flow and trips the circuit breaker if reverse power exceeds a preset threshold (typically 10% of full load). The relay incorporates a time delay to prevent tripping due to transient conditions during synchronization or other short-term disturbances.
(ii) Principle of operation and tripping activation
The reverse power relay operates on the principle of detecting the direction of power flow using the interaction of magnetic fields. The voltage coil generates a magnetic field lagging the voltage by approximately 90°, while the current coil produces a magnetic field proportional to the load current. Both fields interact with the aluminum disc, inducing eddy currents that create a torque.
During normal power flow, the torque rotates the disc in one direction, keeping the trip contacts open. When power reverses, the direction of the torque changes, causing the disc to rotate in the opposite direction. This rotation closes the trip contacts, activating the breaker trip circuit and disconnecting the alternator.
A time delay (typically 5 seconds) prevents the breaker from tripping due to transient power surges during synchronization. Reverse power settings range from 2–6% for turbine-driven alternators and 8–15% for diesel-driven alternators, accounting for the differences in prime mover characteristics.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
What is meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labeling all the important parts, explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator. (16)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.
In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.
A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.
- Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
- Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
- Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
- Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
- Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection for alternators intended for operation. (6)
(b) (i) Sketch a reverse power trip. (5)
(ii) Explain briefly the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated. (5)
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018 Oct 2020
Q4 (10 Marks)
Batteries & Emergency Power
(a) Sketch a standby battery charging/discharging circuit. (8)
(b) Describe the circuit sketched, making special reference to how battery charge is maintained and how it operates upon loss of main power. (8)
Appeared In: Oct 2020
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The DC charging supply is obtained from the main busbar. A transformer will step down the voltage to required charging voltage and a rectifier will provide DC voltage at required charging emf
- When charging from a discharged state, emf is supplied through a branch ‘A’ at full charging voltage
- A voltage monitor ‘V’ monitor the voltage of the cell and gets energised when cell its full charge emf of 2.2V/cell.
- ‘V’ closes contact V1 and energises contact ‘TC’, then TC 1 gets open and TC2 gets closed and current passes through a resistor for trickle charging.
- When main power failure occurs, the contactor KM gets de-energised, so contacts KM1 & KM2 get open and KM3 & KM4 are closed.
- Opening of KM1 & KM2 isolates the battery from charging circuit and KM3 and KM4 closes to allow the battery to supply to emergency services
- A test switch provides means for testing the battery.
Method of maintaining charge:
- Full charge/ Quick charge/ burst charge: when the battery is discharged on load or otherwise full charge switch is switched ON to charge the battery
- Trickle charge/ float charge: batteries get discharged when not in use due to local actions so it is kept on trickle charge where very small amounts of current is supplied just to make up for the loss of charge.
To check operation at loss of main power: test switch is pressed which simulates loss of main power and the charging contacts open and load contacts is made
Duration: for transitional power source 30 minutes for both passenger and cargo ship
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)
(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm,
Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them. (10)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
- For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
- Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:
R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:
R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- And the star-to-delta conversion:
R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3
R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1
R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2
- For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
- Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
- Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
- Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.
105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)
- Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)
- At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)
2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)
- From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
- Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500
140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500
2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.
- Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
- Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
- Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
- Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
- Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
- Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.
So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Sketch an arrangement showing the principal of a proportional plus integral (P + I) control loop.
(b) Compare the series and parallel resonance circuits. Find the frequency at which the following circuit resonates.
Appeared In: Oct 2020 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 6x
Tank liquid level sensors are an integral part of ships. Describe with the aid of suitable sketches the working principle of
(a) Capacitive type level sensor
(b) Ultrasonic level sensor
(c) Float
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles
Analogue Instruments
Definition:
- An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.
Working Principle:
- The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
- In a typical analogue electrical meter:
- The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
- This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
- A spring provides a balancing torque.
- The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).
Digital Instruments
Definition:
- A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).
Working Principle:
- The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
- In a typical digital meter:
- The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
- An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
- A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
- The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.
(b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard
1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
Working Principle:
- The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
- When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
- This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
- Applications Onboard:
- Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
- Advantages:
- Rugged construction and no power requirement.
- Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.
2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter
Working Principle:
- A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
- The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
- The signal is digitised by an ADC.
- The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
- The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
- For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
- Applications Onboard:
- Checking 24V DC control circuits.
- Verifying generator phase voltages.
- Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Deseribe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:
(a) High starting current
(b) Low starting torque.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier, If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor?
(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The Forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
- Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
- The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
- The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
- For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
- The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
- The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 3x
Sketch and deseribe a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A shaft generator (SG) is a synchronous machine directly coupled to a vessel's propulsion shaft. Its speed, and thus the frequency of the generated AC power, varies with the engine's speed. To produce a constant frequency output, regardless of engine speed, the SG utilizes a static converter.
This converter comprises two main sections:
- Rectifier: This section, typically a three-phase diode bridge rectifier, converts the variable-frequency AC output of the shaft generator into direct current (DC). A reactor smooths out the DC current.
- Inverter: This section converts the DC power back into AC power at a constant frequency. This is achieved using a controlled inverter, often employing thyristors switched in sequence. The switching sequence is precisely controlled by a gate signal to create the desired frequency. A crucial aspect here is that the thyristor current needs to be in phase with its voltage to ensure proper turn-off at the end of each AC half-cycle. If the load is inductive (as is typical in ships), a leading reactive power (kVAR) must be supplied to the busbar to achieve this phase alignment. This often involves a synchronous motor acting as a synchronous compensator, whose power factor is adjusted by regulating its DC field current.
The excitation system of the SG is designed to maintain full output voltage even at engine speeds as low as 60% of its maximum. Separate frequency and excitation controllers manage the generator's output as needed. This entire system allows the shaft generator to provide reliable and consistent AC power to the ship's electrical systems, even under varying engine speeds.
Advantages
- Efficiently extracts electrical power from the ship’s main engine, which operates on lower-cost fuel than auxiliary diesel generators (DGs).
- During sea passages, it can supply all of the vessel’s electrical power, allowing auxiliary generators to be shut down, reducing operational costs and wear.
Disadvantages
- High initial installation costs due to the integration of the SG and frequency correction system.
- Complexity in frequency control and power factor management increases system design and maintenance requirements.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series motor, or cumulative compound motor? Explain (6)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min . The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions, (10)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:
$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$
Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.
Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.
Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams.
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.
Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.
For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.
Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.
The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)
(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger,and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x
Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.
(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.
(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant
Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 6x
Tank liquid level sensors are an integral part of ships. Describe with the aid of suitable sketches the working principle of
(a) Capacitive type level sensor
(b) Ultrasonic level sensor
(c) Float
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles
Analogue Instruments
Definition:
- An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.
Working Principle:
- The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
- In a typical analogue electrical meter:
- The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
- This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
- A spring provides a balancing torque.
- The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).
Digital Instruments
Definition:
- A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).
Working Principle:
- The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
- In a typical digital meter:
- The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
- An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
- A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
- The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.
(b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard
1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
Working Principle:
- The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
- When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
- This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
- Applications Onboard:
- Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
- Advantages:
- Rugged construction and no power requirement.
- Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.
2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter
Working Principle:
- A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
- The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
- The signal is digitised by an ADC.
- The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
- The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
- For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
- Applications Onboard:
- Checking 24V DC control circuits.
- Verifying generator phase voltages.
- Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series motor, or cumulative compound motor? Explain (6)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions (10)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:
$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$
Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.
Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.
Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 4x
Explain the methods used to control the speed of a 3 Phase induction motors. Draw and Explain a Variable Frequency Drive used for optimization of energy efficiency of auxillary machineries on board vessels.
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2022 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Methods used to control the speed of a 3-phase induction motor:
- Pole changing: by reconnecting the stator winding (Dahlander or consequent-pole connection) the number of poles is changed, giving discrete synchronous speeds (N = 120 f/P). Simple and efficient but only a few fixed speeds.
- Rotor resistance (slip-ring motors): inserting resistance in the rotor circuit increases the slip and reduces the speed. Simple but inefficient (slip power is lost as heat) and gives poor speed regulation.
- Variable voltage: reducing the stator voltage increases the slip and reduces the speed, but the torque is also reduced and the method is inefficient and gives poor regulation.
- Variable frequency (VFD): varying the supply frequency changes the synchronous speed. This is the most efficient and gives smooth, continuous speed control over a wide range. The voltage is varied in proportion to the frequency (V/f constant) to maintain constant flux and torque.
- Cascade and Scherbius/Kramer systems: used for large motors to recover slip power and give a few efficient speeds.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) for energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery:
- A VFD consists of three main stages:
- Rectifier: converts the a.c. supply to d.c. (a diode or thyristor bridge).
- D.C. link: a capacitor (and inductor) smooths the d.c. voltage.
- Inverter: converts the d.c. back to a.c. at a variable frequency and voltage using IGBTs switched by pulse-width modulation (PWM).
- The control unit varies the output frequency and voltage (maintaining a constant V/f ratio) to control the motor speed.
- Operation: the VFD supplies the motor with a variable-frequency, variable-voltage supply. By controlling the frequency, the synchronous speed and hence the motor speed are controlled. The V/f ratio is kept constant so the air-gap flux and torque capability are maintained. The motor runs at low slip at each speed, so the efficiency is high.
- Energy efficiency: for auxiliary machinery such as pumps, fans and compressors, the load power varies with the cube of the speed (for fans and pumps). By reducing the speed with a VFD instead of throttling or using a fixed speed, the power consumption is greatly reduced. The VFD matches the motor speed to the actual demand, saving energy, reducing wear, and giving soft starting (reduced starting current and mechanical shock). This is why VFDs are widely used to optimise the energy efficiency of auxiliary machinery on board vessels.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x
Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.
(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.
(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant.
Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
What is the meant by "excitation" in an alternator? With the help of a neat diagram of brushless alternator labeling all the important parts, explain how the excitation is achieved in a brushless alternator.
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Excitation in an alternator refers to the process of supplying direct current (DC) to the field windings of the rotor to produce the magnetic field required for electromagnetic induction. This magnetic field interacts with the stator windings to induce an alternating current (AC) output. The strength of the excitation current directly affects the magnetic field strength and hence controls the voltage generated by the alternator.
In modern systems, an automatic voltage regulator (AVR) adjusts the excitation current automatically to maintain stable output voltage despite varying load conditions.
A brushless alternator is a type of electrical generator that produces alternating current (AC) without the need for brushes and commutators.
- Rotor: Instead of using brushes and a commutator, a brushless alternator has a rotor with permanent magnets or electromagnets. These magnets generate a rotating magnetic field when electricity is supplied to them.
- Stator: The stator consists of coils of wire arranged around the rotor. As the magnetic field of the rotor rotates, it induces an alternating current in the stator windings through electromagnetic induction.
- Rectifier: The alternating current produced in the stator windings is then converted into direct current (DC) by a rectifier assembly, typically consisting of diodes. This DC is necessary for the excitation of the rotor's magnets.
- Excitation: The DC is fed to the rotor's electromagnets or permanent magnets, creating a steady magnetic field. This field interacts with the rotating magnetic field of the rotor, inducing a three-phase AC current in the stator windings.
- Output: The three-phase AC output from the stator windings is then available for use in powering electrical devices or for distribution in an electrical grid.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators)
(a) Write a short note on various types of DC Motors. (6)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions.
Appeared In: Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Shunt motor: the field winding is connected in parallel with the armature. It has a nearly constant speed characteristic and moderate starting torque. Used for constant-speed drives such as fans, blowers, and machine tools.
- Series motor: the field winding is in series with the armature. It has a very high starting torque and a falling speed characteristic (constant power). It must never be run without load (overspeed). Used for cranes, hoists, winches, and traction.
- Compound motor: has both a shunt and a series field. Cumulative compound gives high starting torque with a stable speed (used for deck machinery, presses, and loads requiring high starting torque). Differential compound gives a nearly constant speed and is rarely used.
- Permanent magnet motor: uses permanent magnets for the field. Compact and efficient, used for small servo and control applications.
- Back e.m.f. E1 = V - Ia Ra = 440 - 30 x 0.7 = 440 - 21 = 419 V.
- Flux reduced by 20%: phi2 = 0.8 phi1.
- Momentarily, the speed cannot change instantly, so the back e.m.f. falls to E2 = 0.8 x 419 = 335.2 V.
- The armature current momentarily rises to Ia2 = (V - E2)/Ra = (440 - 335.2)/0.7 = 104.8/0.7 = 149.7 A.
- New steady state: torque constant (resisting torque unchanged), so phi1 Ia1 = phi2 Ia2, giving Ia2 = Ia1 (phi1/phi2) = 30/0.8 = 37.5 A.
- New back e.m.f. E2 = V - Ia2 Ra = 440 - 37.5 x 0.7 = 440 - 26.25 = 413.75 V.
- New speed: N proportional to E/phi. N2 = N1 x (E2/E1) x (phi1/phi2) = 700 x (413.75/419) x (1/0.8) = 700 x 0.9875 x 1.25 = 864 rev/min.
- So the armature current momentarily rises to about 150 A, then settles at 37.5 A, and the new steady speed is about 864 rev/min.
- Sketch: the armature current shows a sharp spike to 150 A at the instant of flux reduction, then falls to the new steady value of 37.5 A. The speed rises smoothly from 700 to 864 rev/min as the motor accelerates to the new steady state.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x
Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuitS.
(a) Rectifier circuit
(b) Amplifier circuit
(c) Oscillator circuit.
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Rectifier Circuit
- Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
- Input: AC signal.
- Output: DC signal.
- Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
- Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
- Feedback: No feedback involved.
- Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.
The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.
(b) Amplifier Circuit
- Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
- Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
- Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
- Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
- Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
- Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
- Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.
This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.
(c) Oscillator Circuit
- Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
- Input: DC supply.
- Output: AC signal.
- Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
- Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
- Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
- Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams.
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.
Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.
For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.
Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.
The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)
(b) The low-vollage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz. a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived.
(b) Three batteries A, B and C have their negative terminals connected together between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm
Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
- For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
- Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:
R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:
R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- And the star-to-delta conversion:
R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3
R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1
R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2
- For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
- Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
- Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
- Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.
105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)
- Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)
- At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)
2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)
- From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
- Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500
140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500
2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.
- Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
- Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
- Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
- Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
- Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
- Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.
So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 6x
Tank liquid level sensors are an integral part of ships. Describe with the aid of suitable sketches the working principle of
(a) Capacitive type level sensor
(b) Ultrasonic level sensor
(c) Float
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Jun 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Analogue vs Digital Measuring Instruments and Their Working Principles
Analogue Instruments
Definition:
- An analogue measuring instrument displays the measured value as a continuous movement of a pointer over a graduated scale.
Working Principle:
- The instrument converts the measurand (input quantity) into a proportional mechanical deflection.
- In a typical analogue electrical meter:
- The current flowing through a coil generates a magnetic torque.
- This torque causes the pointer to move across the scale.
- A spring provides a balancing torque.
- The steady deflection of the pointer is proportional to the input signal (e.g., current or voltage).
Digital Instruments
Definition:
- A digital measuring instrument displays the measured value as numerical digits on an electronic display (such as an LCD).
Working Principle:
- The instrument works by sampling the input signal, converting it into digital form, and processing it electronically to produce a precise reading.
- In a typical digital meter:
- The input signal passes through protection and signal conditioning circuits.
- An Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) converts the input voltage into a stream of digital bits.
- A microcontroller or processor computes the final value.
- The processed measurement is displayed on the LCD screen.
(b) Examples of Analogue and Digital Instruments Used Onboard
1. Analogue Instrument: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauge
Working Principle:
- The Bourdon gauge measures fluid pressure using the elastic deformation of a C-shaped metal tube.
- When internal pressure increases, the curved tube tends to straighten.
- This motion is transmitted through a link and sector gear mechanism to a pointer, which moves proportionally across a calibrated dial.
- Applications Onboard:
- Commonly used in lube oil, fuel oil, and cooling water lines.
- Advantages:
- Rugged construction and no power requirement.
- Provides an instant visual indication and helps monitor trends easily.
2. Digital Instrument: Digital Multimeter
Working Principle:
- A digital multimeter measures voltage, current, and resistance electronically.
- The input passes through protection and range selection networks.
- The signal is digitised by an ADC.
- The internal microprocessor computes the corresponding electrical value.
- The result is shown numerically on the LCD display.
- For AC measurements, a true-RMS converter or sampling algorithm ensures accurate readings even for non-sinusoidal waveforms.
- Applications Onboard:
- Checking 24V DC control circuits.
- Verifying generator phase voltages.
- Measuring sensor loop currents such as 4–20 mA signals in control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x
Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.
(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.
(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant.
Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Economic Reasons
- Diesel-electric systems allow for optimal fuel utilization even at low loads, ensuring cost-effectiveness during operations.
- They maintain high efficiency regardless of the engine's speed, making them suitable for variable operating conditions.
- The reduced complexity of the propulsion machinery leads to lower maintenance requirements and costs.
- The reduction in propulsion machinery size frees up more space for other uses, such as cargo storage or additional amenities.
- The system minimizes the likelihood of a complete loss of propulsion power, ensuring uninterrupted vessel operation.
Environmental Reasons
- Diesel-electric systems produce fewer emissions compared to traditional propulsion systems, contributing to reduced environmental impact and compliance with stricter emission regulations.
Operational Convenience
- These systems provide excellent responsiveness from zero to maximum speed, making them highly adaptable to dynamic operating conditions.
- Diesel-electric propulsion allows for shorter reversing times, improving manoeuvrability.
- They ensure quiet operation, enhancing onboard comfort for passengers and crew.
- Minimal mechanical vibrations lead to a smoother and more comfortable sailing experience.
Flexibility
- The mechanical requirements of the shaft system are less complex, allowing for easier installation and maintenance.
- The design and engineering of the propeller are not constrained by the diesel engine, providing greater flexibility in system design.
- Operators can select from a wider range of diesel engines based on their specific operational needs and preferences.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series motor, or cumulative compound motor? Explain.
(6) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions.
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:
$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$
Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.
Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.
Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
Explain the matching of an induction electric motor to a pump required for main circulating duty, with the aid of pump characteristic and torque/slip diagrams.
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2024 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pump started with the discharge valve closed, so the pressure head is high with zero flow rate. As the discharge valve is opened, H decreases and Q increases.
Depending upon the requirements of head (H) pressure and discharge quantity (Q), the operating point is selected, if possible close to maximum efficiency point.
For example, the discharge capacity of OA in m3/min, the power drawn is AB in KW and the head developed in AC in meters. Power drawn P = 2πNT, at a given speed N, the torque required to drive the pump is obtained.
Taking mechanical efficiency of the motor and coupling losses into account, the motor should provide the required torque at a speed close to the pump driving speed.
The motor is to be selected with the required speed and torque as well and its operating point should be within stable speed range with a reasonable margin from stalling torque point.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque? (6)
(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived. (6)
(b) Three batteries A, B,and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm (10)
Battery A 105 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100 V, Internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95 V, Internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
- For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
- Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:
R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:
R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- And the star-to-delta conversion:
R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3
R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1
R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2
- For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
- Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
- Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
- Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.
105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)
- Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)
- At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)
2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)
- From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
- Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500
140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500
2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.
- Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
- Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
- Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
- Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
- Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
- Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.
So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 3x
Sketch and Describe a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A shaft generator (SG) is a synchronous machine directly coupled to a vessel's propulsion shaft. Its speed, and thus the frequency of the generated AC power, varies with the engine's speed. To produce a constant frequency output, regardless of engine speed, the SG utilizes a static converter.
This converter comprises two main sections:
- Rectifier: This section, typically a three-phase diode bridge rectifier, converts the variable-frequency AC output of the shaft generator into direct current (DC). A reactor smooths out the DC current.
- Inverter: This section converts the DC power back into AC power at a constant frequency. This is achieved using a controlled inverter, often employing thyristors switched in sequence. The switching sequence is precisely controlled by a gate signal to create the desired frequency. A crucial aspect here is that the thyristor current needs to be in phase with its voltage to ensure proper turn-off at the end of each AC half-cycle. If the load is inductive (as is typical in ships), a leading reactive power (kVAR) must be supplied to the busbar to achieve this phase alignment. This often involves a synchronous motor acting as a synchronous compensator, whose power factor is adjusted by regulating its DC field current.
The excitation system of the SG is designed to maintain full output voltage even at engine speeds as low as 60% of its maximum. Separate frequency and excitation controllers manage the generator's output as needed. This entire system allows the shaft generator to provide reliable and consistent AC power to the ship's electrical systems, even under varying engine speeds.
Advantages
- Efficiently extracts electrical power from the ship’s main engine, which operates on lower-cost fuel than auxiliary diesel generators (DGs).
- During sea passages, it can supply all of the vessel’s electrical power, allowing auxiliary generators to be shut down, reducing operational costs and wear.
Disadvantages
- High initial installation costs due to the integration of the SG and frequency correction system.
- Complexity in frequency control and power factor management increases system design and maintenance requirements.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator.
(b) Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system.
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.
The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships.
Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems
(a) High starting current
(b) Low starting torque
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Which of the following three motors has the poorest speed regulation: shunt motor, series motor or cumulative compound motor? Explain. (6)
(6) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min. The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions (10)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2024 Oct 2022 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed regulation refers to the change in motor speed from no load to full load, expressed as a percentage of the full-load speed:
$$\%\:Speed\:regulation=\frac{No\:load\:speed\:-\:Full\:load\:speed}{Full\:load\:speed}\:\times100$$
Shunt Motor: The field windings are connected in parallel (shunt) with the armature. Shunt motors have a nearly constant speed regardless of load changes, offering excellent speed regulation. This is because the field current remains relatively stable, keeping the magnetic flux constant.
Series Motor: The field windings are connected in series with the armature. Series motors exhibit significant speed variation with load changes. At no load, they can reach dangerously high speeds, while under heavy load, the speed drops considerably. This results in poor speed regulation, making them unsuitable for applications requiring constant speed.
Cumulative Compound Motor: Combines both series and shunt field windings, with the series field aiding the shunt field. Cumulative compound motors offer a compromise between shunt and series motors. They provide better speed regulation than series motors but are not as precise as shunt motors. The combination of windings helps moderate speed variations with load changes.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 5x
Diesel electric propulsion is now being chosen as the power plant for an increasingly wide variety of vessels.
(a) Sketch a simple layout of such an installation.
(b) Explain the advantages of selecting such a plant.
Appeared In: Jul 2022 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Economic Reasons
- Diesel-electric systems allow for optimal fuel utilization even at low loads, ensuring cost-effectiveness during operations.
- They maintain high efficiency regardless of the engine's speed, making them suitable for variable operating conditions.
- The reduced complexity of the propulsion machinery leads to lower maintenance requirements and costs.
- The reduction in propulsion machinery size frees up more space for other uses, such as cargo storage or additional amenities.
- The system minimizes the likelihood of a complete loss of propulsion power, ensuring uninterrupted vessel operation.
Environmental Reasons
- Diesel-electric systems produce fewer emissions compared to traditional propulsion systems, contributing to reduced environmental impact and compliance with stricter emission regulations.
Operational Convenience
- These systems provide excellent responsiveness from zero to maximum speed, making them highly adaptable to dynamic operating conditions.
- Diesel-electric propulsion allows for shorter reversing times, improving manoeuvrability.
- They ensure quiet operation, enhancing onboard comfort for passengers and crew.
- Minimal mechanical vibrations lead to a smoother and more comfortable sailing experience.
Flexibility
- The mechanical requirements of the shaft system are less complex, allowing for easier installation and maintenance.
- The design and engineering of the propeller are not constrained by the diesel engine, providing greater flexibility in system design.
- Operators can select from a wider range of diesel engines based on their specific operational needs and preferences.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to the provision of a shore electrical supply to a ship:
(a) Sketch an arrangement for taking A.C. shore supply and checks to be carried out prior taking shore connection.
(b) Describe the method of safely connecting the arrangement sketched in (a) to the shore supply
Appeared In: Feb 2021 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A visual inspection should be done to identify any visible damage to the shore power cable, such as cuts, fraying, or signs of overheating.
- Measure the insulation resistance of the shore cable and the ship’s shore connection box to ensure proper insulation.
- Verify the working condition of fuses by performing a continuity test.
- Confirm the functionality of indication lamps for clear status monitoring.
- Ensure that the shore supply circuit breaker is switched off before any connections are made.
- Confirm that the emergency generator is set to manual mode to avoid unintentional operation during shore supply connection.
- Inspect the connecting terminals on both the shore connection box and the cable lugs to ensure they are clean, secure, and free from corrosion.
- Turn off all non-essential equipment to minimize load requirements.
- Keep standby diesel generators in manual mode to prevent automatic starting.
- Announce a potential blackout to notify the crew and prepare them for any temporary power loss.
- Keep a hand safety torch readily available to handle temporary darkness during the transition.
- Shut off the ship's power and alternator.
- Connections of shore cables are to be made only after shutting off the ship's power & alternator.
- Connect the ship’s hull to the shore earth point to provide proper grounding and ensure safety from electrical faults.
- Connect the shore supply cables to the circuit breaker and measure the voltage and frequency of the shore supply to confirm compatibility with the ship's electrical system.
- Verify the phase sequence using the Phase Sequence indicator to avoid incorrect motor rotation or electrical malfunction.
- Ensure that all lids and circuit breakers are switched off before finalizing connections.
- Once all conditions are satisfied, switch on the shore supply circuit breaker.
- Start one motor and confirm the correct direction of rotation to validate the phase sequence.
- Begin connecting essential systems and equipment to the shore supply one at a time. Monitor the load to ensure it does not exceed the shore supply capacity.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Sketch an arrangement showing the principle of a proportional plus integral (P + I) control loop. (6)
(b) Compare the series and parallel resonance circuits. Find the frequency at which the following circuit resonates. (10)
Appeared In: Oct 2020 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
Q9 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Explain the effect of making incorrect phase and starter connections. (6)
(b) A 440V shunt motor takes an armature current of 30A at 700 rev/min The armature resistance is 0.7ohm. If the flux is suddenly reduced 20 per cent, to what value will the armature current rise momentarily? Assuming unchanged resisting torque to motion, what will be the new steady values of speed and armature current? Sketch graphs showing armature current and speed as functions of time during the transition from initial to final, steady-state conditions.
Appeared In: Feb 2021 Feb 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Incorrect Phase Connections:
- Reversing any two phases in a three-phase motor will reverse its rotation direction.
- Incorrect phase connections can result in an unbalanced power supply, leading to uneven current distribution across the motor windings.
- Motors may run noisily, vibrate excessively, or operate at reduced performance levels.
Incorrect Starter Connections:
- Star-delta starters are commonly used to reduce starting current. Incorrect wiring can prevent the motor from transitioning from star to delta connection, or prevent motor from starting.
- Incorrect starter connections can cause the motor to draw excessive current, leading to overheating.
- Continuous operation under incorrect starter conditions can stress the motor components, leading to premature failure.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to Marine Electrical circuits:
(a) Explain three methods of overcurrent protection for electrical circuit.
(b) Explain with aid of diagram, the meaning of the term inverse current time characteristic.
Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Fuses are one of the simplest forms of overcurrent protection. They operate on the principle of the heating effect of electric current. A fuse is made of a thin metallic wire with a low melting point and non-combustible material. When an excessive current flows through the circuit, it generates heat, causing the fuse to melt and thereby interrupting the circuit. This effectively protects the circuit components from damage. Fuses are commonly used as backup protection against short circuits in motors and for cable protection.
A thermal overload relay works on the electro-thermal properties of a bimetallic strip. In this system, the bimetallic strip is placed in the motor circuit so that the current flowing through the motor also passes through the relay. As the current increases, the strip heats up, and if the current exceeds a preset limit, the strip bends due to thermal expansion. This action opens the circuit, providing protection against overloading. Thermal overload relays are widely used to safeguard motors from conditions that could result in overheating due to excessive current.
An electronic overcurrent relay uses advanced microprocessor-based technology combined with temperature sensors or current transformers to sense the current flowing through a circuit. These relays often employ a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to detect overheating conditions. When the temperature or current exceeds the set threshold, the relay trips and interrupts the circuit. This type of relay is always used in combination with a contactor and is connected in line with the motor, allowing the entire motor current to flow through it. Electronic overcurrent relays are particularly suited for applications where motors need to start and stop frequently, offering reliable and precise protection.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x
Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic cireuits.
(a) Rectifier circuit
(b) Amplifier circuit
(c) Oscillator circuit
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Rectifier Circuit
- Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
- Input: AC signal.
- Output: DC signal.
- Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
- Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
- Feedback: No feedback involved.
- Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.
The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.
(b) Amplifier Circuit
- Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
- Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
- Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
- Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
- Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
- Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
- Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.
This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.
(c) Oscillator Circuit
- Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
- Input: DC supply.
- Output: AC signal.
- Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
- Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
- Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
- Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator. Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system.
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.
The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to squirrel cage, induction, electric motors
(a) Describe the construction of such a motor
(b) Sketch the torque against speed curve of such a motor
(c) Describe a method employed by a retrofitted device used to improve the part load performance of an induction motor.
Appeared In: Oct 2025 Sep 2023 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Construction of a Squirrel Cage Induction Motor
A squirrel cage induction motor is a robust and reliable AC motor in which the rotor resembles a squirrel cage, giving the motor its name.
Main Components
1. Stator (Stationary Part)
- Composed of a laminated steel core enclosed within a rigid frame.
- The core contains slots that house the three-phase stator windings.
- When connected to a three-phase supply, these windings produce a rotating magnetic field (RMF).
2. Rotor (Rotating Part)
- Constructed from a laminated steel core with aluminium or copper conductor bars placed in longitudinal slots.
- These rotor bars are short-circuited at both ends by end rings, forming a closed “squirrel cage” structure.
- There is no external electrical connection to the rotor.
3. Air Gap
- A small uniform clearance between the stator and the rotor.
- Allows free rotation of the rotor while minimizing magnetic losses.
4. Shaft and Bearings
- The rotor assembly is mounted on a central shaft.
- The shaft is supported by ball or roller bearings for smooth rotation.
5. End Shields and Cooling System
- End shields enclose the motor and support the bearing housings.
- An external or shaft-mounted cooling fan forces air over the motor’s external cooling fins to dissipate heat.
Characteristics
- Simple and rugged construction.
- Low maintenance requirements due to the absence of brushes or slip rings.
- Fixed rotor resistance, giving relatively fixed-speed operating characteristics.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to a 3 speed a.c. motor driven cargo winch:
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for a pole change motor,
(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed Change:
The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:
$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$
Where,
Ns = Synchronous speed.
f = Frequency of power supply.
P = number of poles.
Methods to Achieve Speed Change:
Multiple Stator Windings:
- Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.
Consequent Pole Method:
- A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.
Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):
- Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.
Braking Mechanism:
Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.
Plugging:
- Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.
Rheostatic Braking:
- In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.
Regenerative Braking:
- For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to electronic control systems
(a) Draw a simple block diagram for temperature control
(b) Describe each component shown in the diagram in (a).
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Jun 2026 Oct 2024 Aug 2024 Jun 2024 Mar 2024 Jan 2024 Sep 2022 Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Temperature Sensor:
- Measures the temperature of the system. Several types exist, including Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs), Thermistors, and filled-tube thermometers. The sensor provides a signal representing the measured value (MV) of the temperature.
Transmitter:
- The transmitter receives the signal from the temperature sensor. Its primary function is to amplify and condition this signal, making it suitable for comparison and processing by the controller. It converts the sensor's output into a standardized signal (e.g., 4-20 mA).
Comparator:
- The comparator compares the measured value (MV) signal from the transmitter with the set value (SV) or desired temperature. The difference between the MV and SV is the error signal. This signal reflects how far the actual temperature deviates from the desired temperature.
Temperature Controller:
- This is the brain of the system. It receives the error signal from the comparator and uses a control algorithm (often a PID – Proportional, Integral, Derivative – controller) to determine the appropriate corrective action. The PID algorithm adjusts the output signal to minimize the error.
Signal Converter:
- This component takes the output signal from the controller and converts it into a form suitable to operate the actuator. For example, it might convert an electrical signal into a pneumatic signal (compressed air pressure) or a hydraulic signal.
Actuator (or 3-way Valve):
- The actuator is the final control element. It receives the converted signal and makes adjustments to the system to correct the temperature. Examples include pneumatic diaphragm control valves, which control the flow of a heating or cooling medium. A higher signal might open the valve to allow more heat, while a lower signal would reduce the flow.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)
(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p. d. of 220V At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in the some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potencial difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest.
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
- Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
- Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
- The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
- Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
- Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
- The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
- In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
- Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
- Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
- Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
- Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
- Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:
0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y
0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)
0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x
0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.
- y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
- So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
- Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
- Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
- Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
- (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
- The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.
So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
With reference to Synchronous Motors:
(a) Draw and Explain the principle of operation of Synchronous Motors. (6)
(b) Find the synchronous impedance and reactance of an alternator in which a given field current produces an armature current of 200 A on short circuit and a generated e.m.f. of 50V on open-circuit. The armature resistance is 0.1 ohm. To what induced voltage must the alternator be excited if it is to deliver a load of 100 A at a p.f. of 0.8 lagging, with a terminal voltage of 200 V. (10)
Appeared In: Dec 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A synchronous motor has a three-phase stator winding (like an induction motor) and a rotor with a d.c. field winding (or permanent magnets). The stator produces a rotating magnetic field at synchronous speed Ns = 120 f/P.
- The rotor is excited with d.c., producing a fixed magnetic field. The rotor locks in step with the rotating stator field and rotates at exactly synchronous speed (no slip).
- The motor is not self-starting: the rotor must be brought up to near synchronous speed (by a starting winding or by an external drive) before the d.c. field is applied, so that the rotor poles can lock onto the rotating field.
- Once running, the motor maintains synchronous speed regardless of load (up to the pull-out torque). The load angle (torque angle) delta increases with load. By varying the d.c. field excitation, the motor can operate at unity, lagging, or leading power factor (over-excitation gives a leading power factor, useful for power-factor correction).
- The sketch shows the stator winding, the rotor field winding, the d.c. excitation supply, and the rotating field.
- Synchronous impedance Zs = open-circuit e.m.f./short-circuit current = 50/200 = 0.25 ohm.
- Synchronous reactance Xs = sqrt(Zs^2 - Ra^2) = sqrt(0.25^2 - 0.1^2) = sqrt(0.0525) = 0.229 ohm.
- Induced voltage to deliver 100 A at 0.8 p.f. lagging with terminal voltage 200 V:
- Assume star-connected. Phase voltage Vph = 200/root 3 = 115.5 V. I = 100 A. cos phi = 0.8, sin phi = 0.6.
- E = sqrt[(Vph cos phi + I Ra)^2 + (Vph sin phi + I Xs)^2]
- = sqrt[(115.5 x 0.8 + 100 x 0.1)^2 + (115.5 x 0.6 + 100 x 0.229)^2]
- = sqrt[(92.4 + 10)^2 + (69.3 + 22.9)^2] = sqrt[102.4^2 + 92.2^2] = sqrt[18987] = 137.8 V per phase.
- Line value = 137.8 x root 3 = 238.6 V.
So the alternator must be excited to give about 137.8 V per phase (238.6 V line).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to preferential tripping in a marine electrical distribution system:
(a) With the aid of a sketch, describe a typical arrangement to provide three stages of tripping an instantaneous protection against short circuit.
(b) State why this protection is required.
Appeared In: Jul 2022 Nov 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Preferential trips operate after a fixed time delay, causing non-essential loads to be shed.
When the generator load reaches 110%, preferential Trip comes into operation as follows
First Stage Preferential Tripping (PT1):
- Initiated when the current on a running generator exceeds 100% of the generator rating for a period of 10 seconds.
- Protects against overcurrent by releasing the 1st stage preferential tripping.
- Shut down non-essential loads (air-conditioning, entertainment, accommodation fans, cargo hold fans, amplifiers, etc.) to reduce the generator load
Second Stage Preferential Tripping (PT2):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator continues to exceed 100% of the generator rating for an additional 5 seconds.
- Shut down additional loads such as cargo hold vent fans and packaged air conditioning units. (service required for running the ship properly, leaving loads of top priority services to maintain propulsion and navigation) if the generator load is still high
Third Stage Preferential Tripping (PT3):
- Initiated if the current on a running generator persists in exceeding 100% of the generator rating for 15 seconds.
- Shut down the main generator as the last action, if the load is still too high, it may be due to a short circuit or insulation breaking.
Short Circuit Protection (Instantaneous Tripping):
- Current transformers (CTs) monitor the current in each phase. In the event of a short circuit, the CT's secondary coil energizes the short circuit trip coil.
- This generates a strong magnetic pull that trips the main breaker immediately, isolating the fault.
Main Breaker Trip
- If the overload condition continues after non-essential loads have been shed, the final time-delay relay (e.g., 60 seconds) trips the main breaker to protect the alternator from damage.
Overload Protection and Alarms
- Overload protection relays monitor all three phases and provide audio-visual alarms as warnings before tripping occurs.
- In marine electrical systems, continuous power supply to the switchboard is essential to maintain vessel safety. A blackout resulting from the tripping of the alternator breaker can compromise the vessel’s operation and safety.
- The preferential tripping system ensures that the alternator breaker only trips instantly in the event of a severe fault like a short circuit.
- For less severe overcurrent conditions (e.g., 110% of full load), time-delayed relays perform preferential tripping by shedding non-essential loads such as galley equipment, air conditioning, and ventilation fans.
- By reducing the alternator's load incrementally, the system prevents the main breaker from tripping unnecessarily and avoids a complete power blackout, ensuring essential systems remain powered.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 5x
Explain why it is necessary to have reverse power protection for alternators intended for operation.
(a) Sketch a reverse power trip
(b) Explain briefly the principle on which the operation of this power trip is based and how tripping is activated
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Dec 2020 Nov 2018 Oct 2020
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse power protection is essential to safeguard alternators in parallel operation from the adverse effects of reverse power flow. When the prime mover of an alternator fails to provide sufficient torque, the alternator starts acting as a motor and draws power from the busbar—a condition known as the motoring effect. This situation can cause significant damage to the prime mover, as it may overspeed due to the additional energy supplied by the alternator. Such overspeed can lead to mechanical failures, including damaged shafts and broken turbine blades.
Furthermore, the reverse power effect imposes additional loads on other alternators in the system. These alternators may overload and trip due to excessive power demands, potentially leading to a blackout that compromises the safety and operational reliability of the vessel. The alternator subjected to reverse power may also lose its residual magnetism, impairing its ability to generate power effectively when restored.
To mitigate these risks, a reverse power relay is installed. This relay monitors the direction of power flow and trips the circuit breaker if reverse power exceeds a preset threshold (typically 10% of full load). The relay incorporates a time delay to prevent tripping due to transient conditions during synchronization or other short-term disturbances.
(ii) Principle of operation and tripping activation
The reverse power relay operates on the principle of detecting the direction of power flow using the interaction of magnetic fields. The voltage coil generates a magnetic field lagging the voltage by approximately 90°, while the current coil produces a magnetic field proportional to the load current. Both fields interact with the aluminum disc, inducing eddy currents that create a torque.
During normal power flow, the torque rotates the disc in one direction, keeping the trip contacts open. When power reverses, the direction of the torque changes, causing the disc to rotate in the opposite direction. This rotation closes the trip contacts, activating the breaker trip circuit and disconnecting the alternator.
A time delay (typically 5 seconds) prevents the breaker from tripping due to transient power surges during synchronization. Reverse power settings range from 2–6% for turbine-driven alternators and 8–15% for diesel-driven alternators, accounting for the differences in prime mover characteristics.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x
Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)
(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p. d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in the some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potential difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest. (10)
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
- Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
- Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
- The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
- Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
- Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
- The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
- In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
- Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
- Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
- Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
- Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
- Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:
0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y
0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)
0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x
0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.
- y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
- So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
- Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
- Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
- Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
- (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
- The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.
So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torque of the three- phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque. (6)
(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35 ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn into ths "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 3x
Sketch and Describe a main engine shaft driven generator arrangement with an electronic system for frequency correction.
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Mar 2019 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A shaft generator (SG) is a synchronous machine directly coupled to a vessel's propulsion shaft. Its speed, and thus the frequency of the generated AC power, varies with the engine's speed. To produce a constant frequency output, regardless of engine speed, the SG utilizes a static converter.
This converter comprises two main sections:
- Rectifier: This section, typically a three-phase diode bridge rectifier, converts the variable-frequency AC output of the shaft generator into direct current (DC). A reactor smooths out the DC current.
- Inverter: This section converts the DC power back into AC power at a constant frequency. This is achieved using a controlled inverter, often employing thyristors switched in sequence. The switching sequence is precisely controlled by a gate signal to create the desired frequency. A crucial aspect here is that the thyristor current needs to be in phase with its voltage to ensure proper turn-off at the end of each AC half-cycle. If the load is inductive (as is typical in ships), a leading reactive power (kVAR) must be supplied to the busbar to achieve this phase alignment. This often involves a synchronous motor acting as a synchronous compensator, whose power factor is adjusted by regulating its DC field current.
The excitation system of the SG is designed to maintain full output voltage even at engine speeds as low as 60% of its maximum. Separate frequency and excitation controllers manage the generator's output as needed. This entire system allows the shaft generator to provide reliable and consistent AC power to the ship's electrical systems, even under varying engine speeds.
Advantages
- Efficiently extracts electrical power from the ship’s main engine, which operates on lower-cost fuel than auxiliary diesel generators (DGs).
- During sea passages, it can supply all of the vessel’s electrical power, allowing auxiliary generators to be shut down, reducing operational costs and wear.
Disadvantages
- High initial installation costs due to the integration of the SG and frequency correction system.
- Complexity in frequency control and power factor management increases system design and maintenance requirements.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram for an automatic voltage regulator illustrating how the A.V.R. utilizes a silicon-controlled rectifier to control the excitation system for an alternator.
(b) Describe how the A.V.R. monitors output and controls the excitation system.
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Mar 2024 Dec 2020 Mar 2019 Dec 2018 Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) regulates the generator terminal voltage by controlling the amount of current supplied to the generator field winding by the exciter.
The AVR controls the alternator output voltage by automatic adjustment of the exciter stator field strength. The AVR provides closed-loop control by sensing the alternator output voltage at the main stator windings and adjusting the exciter stator field strength
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:
(a) High starting current
(b) Low starting torque.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x
Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuits.
(a) Rectifier circuit
(b) Amplifier circuit
(c) Oscillator circuit
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Rectifier Circuit
- Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
- Input: AC signal.
- Output: DC signal.
- Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
- Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
- Feedback: No feedback involved.
- Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.
The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.
(b) Amplifier Circuit
- Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
- Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
- Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
- Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
- Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
- Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
- Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.
This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.
(c) Oscillator Circuit
- Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
- Input: DC supply.
- Output: AC signal.
- Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
- Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
- Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
- Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to Marine Electrical circuits:
(a) Explain three methods of overeurrent protection for electrical circuit
(b) Explain with aid of diagram, the meaning of the term inverse current time characteristic.
Appeared In: Jan 2019 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Fuses are one of the simplest forms of overcurrent protection. They operate on the principle of the heating effect of electric current. A fuse is made of a thin metallic wire with a low melting point and non-combustible material. When an excessive current flows through the circuit, it generates heat, causing the fuse to melt and thereby interrupting the circuit. This effectively protects the circuit components from damage. Fuses are commonly used as backup protection against short circuits in motors and for cable protection.
A thermal overload relay works on the electro-thermal properties of a bimetallic strip. In this system, the bimetallic strip is placed in the motor circuit so that the current flowing through the motor also passes through the relay. As the current increases, the strip heats up, and if the current exceeds a preset limit, the strip bends due to thermal expansion. This action opens the circuit, providing protection against overloading. Thermal overload relays are widely used to safeguard motors from conditions that could result in overheating due to excessive current.
An electronic overcurrent relay uses advanced microprocessor-based technology combined with temperature sensors or current transformers to sense the current flowing through a circuit. These relays often employ a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor to detect overheating conditions. When the temperature or current exceeds the set threshold, the relay trips and interrupts the circuit. This type of relay is always used in combination with a contactor and is connected in line with the motor, allowing the entire motor current to flow through it. Electronic overcurrent relays are particularly suited for applications where motors need to start and stop frequently, offering reliable and precise protection.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 9x
With reference to a 3 speed a.c. cage motor driven cargo winch:
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram or a pole change motor
(b) Describe how speed change and braking are achieved
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Jun 2024 Sep 2023 Oct 2022 Dec 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Speed Change:
The synchronous speed of an induction motor is governed by the formula:
$$N_{s}=\frac{120f}{P}$$
Where,
Ns = Synchronous speed.
f = Frequency of power supply.
P = number of poles.
Methods to Achieve Speed Change:
Multiple Stator Windings:
- Two sets of windings are installed on the stator, each designed for different pole numbers. Only one winding is energized at a time, allowing a change in speed.
Consequent Pole Method:
- A single stator winding is divided into coil groups. By altering the connections (series or parallel), the number of poles is changed, resulting in different speeds.
Pole Amplitude Modulation (PAM):
- Used when a speed ratio other than 2: 1 is required. The winding is split into parts that can be connected in series or parallel. The current direction in specific parts of the winding determines the pole configuration, allowing finer speed adjustments.
Braking Mechanism:
Braking is used to reduce the torque and stop the motor.
Plugging:
- Plugging is a braking method where the power supply to the motor is switched over in a way that two phases are interchanged. This creates a reverse torque that quickly reduces the motor speed. Once the speed becomes negligible, the power is switched off to prevent the motor from running in the opposite direction. An electromagnetic brake is then applied to stop the motor.
Rheostatic Braking:
- In this method, the motor is switched off, and all three phases are shorted through rheostats. The rheostats act as resistors, dissipating the kinetic energy of the motor in the form of heat through copper losses. The resistance provided by the rheostats slows down the motor and brings it to a stop.
Regenerative Braking:
- For regenerative braking, the motor is switched off from the A.C. power supply, and the stator winding is provided with a D.C. supply from batteries. The fixed magnetic flux of the D.C. tries to create a magnetic locking with the rotating rotor poles, generating a retarding torque that reduces the motor speed. When the speed drops to zero, the D.C. supply is switched off, and an electromagnetic brake is applied to stop the motor.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Explain the preference for a 60 Hz system. Describe the dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply. (6)
(b) A ring-main, 900m long, is supplied at a point A at a p. d. of 220V. At a point B, 240m from A, a load of 45A is drawn from the main, and at a point C, 580m from A, measured in the some direction, a load of 78A is taken from the main. If the resistance of the main (lead and return) is 0.25 ohm per kilometre, calculate the current which will flow in each direction round the main from the supply point A and the potencial difference across the main, at the load where it is lowest.
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Jun 2025 Mar 2025 - 1 Jan 2025 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- 60 Hz is preferred in many regions (Americas) because for the same machine size and voltage, a 60 Hz machine runs faster and delivers more power than a 50 Hz machine, giving a better power-to-weight ratio. Motors and generators are smaller and lighter for the same output. Lighting flicker is also less noticeable at 60 Hz.
- Dangers of running a 50 Hz system from a 60 Hz supply:
- Motors run at 20% higher speed (speed is proportional to frequency). This increases the centrifugal stress on rotating parts, which may exceed the design limits and cause mechanical failure.
- The magnetising current and iron losses change; the flux is reduced (since V/f ratio changes), which can reduce torque and cause overheating in some machines.
- Transformers and induction motors designed for 50 Hz will have higher iron loss and may overheat when operated at 60 Hz at the same voltage, because the core flux and eddy current losses increase with frequency.
- Timing devices, clocks and frequency-dependent equipment will run fast.
- The V/f ratio is altered, which can cause excessive magnetising current and saturation problems.
- In general, equipment must be designed for the supply frequency; operating 50 Hz equipment on 60 Hz (or vice versa) without derating is dangerous.
- Resistance per metre = 0.25/1000 = 0.00025 ohm/m.
- Segment resistances: A-B = 240 x 0.00025 = 0.06 ohm; B-C = (580-240) x 0.00025 = 340 x 0.00025 = 0.085 ohm; C-A (closing, the other way round) = (900-580) x 0.00025 = 320 x 0.00025 = 0.08 ohm.
- Let x = current flowing from A towards B (the long path A-B-C), and y = current flowing from A the other way directly to C (the short path, 320 m). Total x + y = 45 + 78 = 123 A.
- Current in segment A-B = x. Current in segment B-C = x - 45 (after 45 A is taken at B). Current in the short path A-C = y.
- Around the loop A-B-C-A, the voltage drops must balance:
0.06 x + 0.085 (x - 45) = 0.08 y
0.06 x + 0.085 x - 3.825 = 0.08 (123 - x)
0.145 x - 3.825 = 9.84 - 0.08 x
0.225 x = 13.665 -> x = 60.73 A.
- y = 123 - 60.73 = 62.27 A.
- So the current from A towards B (through B) is 60.73 A, and the current from A the other way towards C is 62.27 A.
- Check at C: current arriving = (x - 45) + y = 15.73 + 62.27 = 78 A. Correct.
- Voltage at B: drop A-B = 0.06 x 60.73 = 3.64 V. V_B = 220 - 3.64 = 216.36 V.
- Voltage at C: drop along short path = 0.08 x 62.27 = 4.98 V. V_C = 220 - 4.98 = 215.02 V.
- (Drop along long path to C = 0.06 x 60.73 + 0.085 x 15.73 = 3.64 + 1.34 = 4.98 V, giving the same V_C = 215.02 V.)
- The lowest voltage is at C, the most remote load: V_C = 215.0 V.
So currents from A are 60.7 A (towards B) and 62.3 A (towards C), and the lowest voltage across the main is about 215 V at load C.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
(a) Sketch a circuit diagram of a push button direct on line contactor starter for a three phase incorporating overload and short circuit protection.
(b) Indicate on a sketch of the typical characteristic curves of current and torque against Speed, disadvantages of a direct on line start squirrel cage induction motor.
Appeared In: Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The main supply is connected to the contactor, which, when energized, connects the A.C motor to the supply.
- The START push button activates the contactor, allowing the motor to start running.
- Overload protection (O/L Relay) and Single Phase Protection Relay are connected in series with the contactor in the control circuit.
- If any protection device detects a fault (e.g., overload or single phasing), the contactor drops, opening the normally closed (NC) contacts and stopping the motor.
- The STOP push button also causes the contactor to drop, stopping the motor.
- The START and STOP push buttons can be located remotely for remote operation of the motor.
- The contactor has a solenoid with normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts, facilitating the control system's requirements.
- The main electrical equipment is connected to the supply through the contacts of the contactor, ensuring controlled motor operation and protection against faults.
Disadvantages of DOL starter:
-
Direct-on-line starting of a squirrel cage induction motor results in a high inrush current, typically 6 to 8 times the rated full-load current. This high current can cause voltage dips and disturbances in the electrical system, especially when starting large motors. It can also lead to excessive heating of the motor windings and reduced motor life.
-
The direct-on-line starting method produces high starting torque, which can be excessive for some applications. This high torque can cause mechanical stress on the motor
-
The high starting current of a direct-on-line start motor can cause voltage fluctuations in the electrical system. These voltage fluctuations can affect other sensitive equipment connected to the same electrical network, potentially causing malfunctions or disruptions.
-
Direct-on-line starting is not suitable for applications where a soft start or controlled acceleration is required. It is also not recommended for motors that are frequently started and stopped, as the high starting current and torque can cause premature motor failure.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electronics & Digital 🔥 Repeated 8x
Differentiate with the aid of simple sketches between the following types of electronic circuits.
(a) Rectifier circuit
(b) Amplifier circuit
(c) Oscillator circuit
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Rectifier Circuit
- Converts AC (Alternating Current) into DC (Direct Current).
- Input: AC signal.
- Output: DC signal.
- Operation: Conducts during the positive half cycle of the input signal (half-wave rectifier) or during both half cycles (full-wave rectifier).
- Types: Half-wave, full-wave, bridge rectifier.
- Feedback: No feedback involved.
- Use Case: Used continuously for powering DC loads.
The sketch shows a simplified representation of an AC input waveform being converted into a pulsating DC waveform by a rectifier. A smoothing capacitor is added to reduce the pulsations and produce a more constant DC output.
(b) Amplifier Circuit
- Amplifies the amplitude of a weak signal without altering its waveform.
- Input: Weak signal to be amplified.
- Output: Amplified version of the input signal.
- Operation: Amplifies signals during both positive and negative cycles.
- Types: Categorized by frequency (audio, RF), or by physical placement (voltage, current amplifiers).
- Feedback: Uses negative feedback to stabilize gain.
- Use Case: Repeatedly used in circuits to maintain signal strength.
This sketch illustrates a generic amplifier. The input signal is smaller than the output signal.
(c) Oscillator Circuit
- Generates periodic, oscillating electronic signals such as sine waves or square waves.
- Input: DC supply.
- Output: AC signal.
- Operation: Converts DC into AC using positive feedback.
- Types: Linear (sine wave oscillators) and non-linear (square wave, sawtooth oscillators).
- Feedback: Uses positive feedback to sustain oscillations.
- Use Case: Used initially in circuits to provide a signal source.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) In a.c. generators, voltage dip occurs in two stages.
(i) Sketch a voltage-time graph showing the pattern of voltage dip.
(ii) Referring to this graph, state with reasons the effect on the electrical system of a small power installation when a large load is suddenly switched on.
(b) Explain EACH of the following categories of voltage control:
(i) Error operated:
(ii) Functional.
Appeared In: Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The regulation state that the voltage must recover within 1.5 seconds. However an acceptable recovery time would be 0.5 seconds for a brushless and 0.2 seconds or less for a compounded machine.
(ii) Effect on small power installation:
When a large load is suddenly applied, the electrical system experiences a significant voltage dip. Initially, there is a sharp drop in voltage due to the high inrush current drawn by the load. This is followed by a slower decrease as the alternator's reactance and power factor affect the voltage. During this period, the alternator’s excitation system, AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulator), and prime mover governor work to restore the voltage.
The sudden load causes a drop in power factor, increasing the reactive power demand on the system. If the voltage dip is significant and prolonged, sensitive equipment may malfunction, and other connected loads might experience disruptions. The system's ability to recover depends on the alternator's capacity, excitation response, and governor speed control.
In this method, the output voltage of the bus bar is continuously measured and compared to the normal rated voltage. Any deviation from the desired voltage generates an error signal, which is sent to the excitation system. This error signal adjusts the excitation to regulate the output voltage. For instance, if the voltage drops, the excitation current is increased, and if the voltage rises, the excitation is reduced.
Examples of error-operated voltage control include brushless alternators with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and alternators using a carbon pile AVR and DC exciter.
(ii) Functional Voltage Control:
This type of voltage control is directly based on the instantaneous value of the voltage. If the voltage falls, the excitation is increased proportionally to the amount of voltage drop, and vice versa. Since the excitation is a direct function of the voltage, it is referred to as functional voltage control.
Static excitation systems are an example of functional voltage control. These systems offer faster response times compared to error-operated methods, making them suitable for applications requiring precise and rapid voltage regulation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations
(a) Describe the normal criteria used for setting thermal protection relays and its advantage compared to magnetic types. (6)
(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 35Ω. When connected to a 220V, 50Hz, a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2A, and when the plunger is drawn into the "full-in" position the current falls to 0.7A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both positions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.
Appeared In: Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
are designed for sustained overcurrent protection, typically set between 105-120% of the full load current with a time delay. They are not intended for momentary overcurrents.
The overcurrent setting depends on the following:
- The electrical system's maximum continuous load capacity determines the relay settings to ensure the system operates without tripping under normal conditions.
- The relay settings are influenced by the insulation class and its capacity to withstand elevated temperatures.
- The amount of power consumption and heat generated during normal operation is evaluated to set the relay accurately.
- The relay takes into account the cooling mechanism in place to ensure that heat dissipation during operation is factored into the thermal protection settings.
Advantages of Thermal relays over Magnetic relays:
- Thermal relays provide a time delay, preventing tripping from momentary overcurrents that might not cause actual damage. Magnetic relays respond much faster.
- Thermal relays operate based on the heat generated by an overcurrent, offering a more accurate reflection of the actual thermal stress on the system. Magnetic relays respond to the magnitude of the current, irrespective of heat generation.
- Thermal relays are more economical because they use bimetals instead of more expensive magnetic solenoid coils.
- Thermal relays are effective for sustained overcurrents, providing protection that is independent of other factors like the system voltage or magnetic field fluctuations.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier. If the supply voltage is v(t) = VmSin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor?
(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A. (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
- Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
- The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
- The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
- For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
- The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
- The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Deseribe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:
(a) High starting current
(b) Low starting torque.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Batteries & Emergency Power 🔥 Repeated 2x
Sketch and describe an arrangement for automatic connection of emergency batteries upon loss of main power. Include in your answer:
(a) Means of obtaining d.c. charging supply from a.c. mains:
(b) A method of maintaining charge on lead acid batteries;
(c) The arrangement to check that batteries operate at loss of main power
(d) The length of time for which emergency batteries of passenger and cargo ships must provide power.
Appeared In: Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The DC charging supply is obtained from the main busbar. A transformer will step down the voltage to required charging voltage and a rectifier will provide DC voltage at required charging emf
- When charging from a discharged state, emf is supplied through a branch ‘A’ at full charging voltage
- A voltage monitor ‘V’ monitor the voltage of the cell and gets energised when cell its full charge emf of 2.2V/cell.
- ‘V’ closes contact V1 and energises contact ‘TC’, then TC 1 gets open and TC2 gets closed and current passes through a resistor for trickle charging.
- When main power failure occurs, the contactor KM gets de-energised, so contacts KM1 & KM2 get open and KM3 & KM4 are closed.
- Opening of KM1 & KM2 isolates the battery from charging circuit and KM3 and KM4 closes to allow the battery to supply to emergency services
- A test switch provides means for testing the battery.
from the mainline through a bridge rectifier, which converts AC to DC.
- Full charge/ Quick charge/ burst charge: when the battery is discharged on load or otherwise full charge switch is switched ON to charge the battery
- Trickle charge/ float charge: batteries get discharged when not in use due to local actions so it is kept on trickle charge where very small amounts of current is supplied just to make up for the loss of charge.
test switch is pressed which simulates loss of main power and the charging contacts open and load contacts is made
for transitional power source 30 minutes for both passenger and cargo ship
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x
Discuss the criteria of the classification of marine high voltage for A.C. and D.C. Systems. Sketch a Ships high voltage distribution system and explain its features. Discuss the various methods of testing the insulation of HV system. Mention the significance of PI Test, why 3 terminals insulation testers are used in HV insulation measurements?
Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:
- AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
- DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
- Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.
Ships High Voltage Distribution System:
- 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
- High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
- HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
- High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
- High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
- High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
- Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
- Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.
Methods of Testing HV Insulation
Megger Testing:
- This involves applying a high DC voltage (e.g., 5000 V DC for a 6.6 kV system) using a megger to measure insulation resistance. A minimum insulation resistance is specified (e.g., (kV + 10) MΩ; for 6.6 kV, this would be at least 7.6 MΩ). This test checks for insulation degradation.
Polarization Index (PI) Test:
- This test is performed when low insulation resistance is detected. It measures the ratio of insulation resistance after 10 minutes of applying voltage to the resistance after 1 minute. A PI value greater than 1.1 generally indicates that the insulation is absorbing moisture, and may be improved by further heating (for example, with an infrared lamp to dry the windings). A PI of 1 shows damaged winding insulation requiring rewinding.
- The Polarization Index (PI) Test is particularly significant as it helps in detecting moisture presence, assessing insulation aging, and informing maintenance decisions. Low PI values can indicate moisture presence, while higher values suggest better insulation quality.
3-Terminal Insulation Testers:
- These testers offer improved safety. One terminal is firmly grounded. Any leakage current flows through the earth connection, preventing electric shock to the user during testing.
Advantages of 3-Terminal Insulation Testers:
- Increased safety for operators, especially in high-voltage systems.
- Ensures reliable insulation resistance measurements even in adverse conditions.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming rach of the following problems.
(a) High starting current
(b) Low starting torque
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) By means of a schematic circuit diagram illustrate the peak rectifier, If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm Sin wt, what is the voltage across the load resistor?
(b) A battery-charging circuit is shown below in Fig. The Forward resistance of the diode can be considered negligible and the reverse resistance infinite. The internal resistance of the battery is negligible. Calculate the necessary value of the variable resistance R so that the battery charging current is 1.0 A
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2022 Jan 2020 Jul 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A peak rectifier consists of a diode in series with a capacitor and a load resistor. The diode rectifies the a.c. input and charges the capacitor to the peak value of the input voltage.
- Circuit: a.c. source -> diode -> node (capacitor to earth, load resistor to earth). The output is taken across the capacitor/load.
- Operation: during the positive half cycle the diode conducts and charges the capacitor to the peak value Vm. When the input falls below the capacitor voltage, the diode becomes reverse biased and stops conducting; the capacitor discharges slowly through the load resistor. If the time constant (R x C) is large compared with the period, the capacitor holds the voltage near Vm, so the output is approximately the peak value.
- If the supply voltage is v(t) = Vm sin(wt), the voltage across the load resistor is approximately the peak value Vm (for an ideal diode with negligible forward drop and a large time constant). The output is a d.c. voltage close to Vm, with a small ripple.
- The circuit is a half-wave (or full-wave) rectifier feeding a battery through a variable resistor R. The diode forward resistance is negligible and reverse resistance infinite; battery internal resistance negligible.
- The charging current is to be 1.0 A. The battery has a fixed e.m.f. (say E_b). The rectified supply provides a peak voltage Vm. The charging current flows only when the instantaneous rectified voltage exceeds the battery e.m.f.
- For a half-wave rectifier, the mean charging current is given by the average of (v - E_b)/R over the conducting period.
- The necessary value of R is found from: R = (V_mean - E_b) / I_charge, where V_mean is the mean rectified voltage available. For example, if the supply peak is Vm and the battery e.m.f. is E_b, then R = (Vm - E_b)/1.0 ohm (for a simple d.c. equivalent), or using the mean value of the rectified waveform.
- The variable resistor is adjusted so that the charging current is exactly 1.0 A. (The exact numerical value depends on the supply voltage and battery e.m.f. given in the figure; the method is to set R so that the mean charging current equals 1.0 A.)
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 11x
(a) List the factors that determine the starting torgue of the three-phase induction motor. How does this torque generally compare with the value of the rated torque.
(b) The low-voltage release of an a.c. motor-starter consists of a solenoid into which an iron plunger is drawn against a spring. The resistance of the solenoid is 3S ohm. When connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz a.c. supply the current taken is at first 2 A, and when the plunger is drawn mto the "full-in' position the current falls to 0.7 A. Calculate the inductance of the solenoid for both postions of the plunger, and the maximum value of flux-linkages in Weber-turns for the "full-in" position of the plunger.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jun 2024 Oct 2025 Nov 2024 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Starting torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage. A reduced supply voltage will significantly reduce the starting torque.
- Higher rotor resistance leads to higher starting torque but also lower efficiency and higher rotor heating at running speeds. This is because higher resistance allows for greater current flow in the rotor at standstill.
- Increasing rotor resistance enhances starting torque by improving the power factor, but it also leads to higher losses and reduced efficiency during normal operation.
- Changes in frequency affect the motor's magnetic field and slip, impacting starting torque. Generally, lower frequency results in higher torque.
- The design of the stator windings, including the number of turns, winding configuration (star or delta), and the shape and placement of the stator poles, significantly affects the strength of the magnetic field produced, thus affecting torque.
- A smaller air gap between the stator and rotor generally leads to higher starting torque due to increased magnetic coupling.
Comparison with Rated Torque:
Typically, the starting torque of a standard three-phase induction motor is designed to be equal to or slightly higher than the rated (full-load) torque. This design ensures that the motor can overcome initial inertia and start the load effectively. However, the exact ratio varies based on motor design and application requirements. For instance, some motors may have a starting torque that is 1.25 times the full-load torque, while others, especially those designed for high starting torque applications, may have even higher ratios.
While higher starting torque is beneficial for initiating motion, it often comes with an increased starting current, which can impact the electrical supply system. Therefore, motor designs aim to balance starting torque and current to suit specific application needs.
$$Resistance \space of \space solenoid \space = \space 35Ω$$
$$Supply \space voltage \space = 220V, \space 50Hz$$
$$Initial \space current \space = \space 2A$$
$$Current \space in \space "Full-in" \space position \space = \space 0.7A$$
When plunger is out (initial stage),
$$Impedance \space (Z) \space = \space {{220} \over 2} \space = \space 110Ω$$
$$Inductive \space reactance \space (X) \space = \space \sqrt{Z^2 - R^2}$$
$$X \space = \space \sqrt{110^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 104.28Ω$$
$$Also, \space X \space = \space 2 \pi fl$$
$$l \space = \space {{X} \over 2 \pi f} \space = \space {{104.28} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50} $$
$$l \space = \space 0.33H$$
Inductance of solenoid when plunger is out = 0.33H
When "Full-in",
$$Impedance \space = \space {{V} \over I} \space = \space {{220}\over 0.7} \space = \space 314.286Ω$$
$$∴ \space X \space = \space \sqrt{314.286^2 - 35^2} \space = \space 312.33Ω$$
$$l \space = \space {{312.33} \over 2 \times 3.14 \times 50 } \space = \space 0.994H $$
$$Also, L \space = \space {{N \phi} \over I_{peak}}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space L \space I_{peak}$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.994 \times \sqrt{2} \times 0.7$$
$$∴ \space N \phi \space = \space 0.984 \space weber-turn$$
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q10 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) With the aid of delta and star connection diagrams, state the basic equation from which the delta-star and star-delta conversion equation can be derived
(b) Three batteries A, B, and C have their negative terminals connected together, between the positive terminals of A and B there is a resistor of 0.5 ohm and between B and C there is a resistor of 0.3 ohm.
Battery A 105V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Battery B 100V, internal resistance 0.2 ohm
Battery C 95V, internal resistance 0.25 ohm
Determine the current values in the two resistors and the power dissipated by them.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Oct 2025 Apr 2018 Aug 2024 Jan 2023 Oct 2020 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The basic equation is that the resistance between any two terminals must be the same in both the star and delta networks.
- For a delta network with resistances R12 (between terminals 1-2), R23 (2-3), R31 (3-1), and a star network with resistances R1, R2, R3 (each connected to a terminal and a common centre point):
- Resistance between terminals 1 and 2: in delta it is R12 in parallel with (R23 + R31); in star it is R1 + R2. Equating:
R1 + R2 = R12 (R23 + R31) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 + R3 = R23 (R31 + R12) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 + R1 = R31 (R12 + R23) / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- Solving these gives the delta-to-star conversion:
R1 = R12 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R2 = R12 R23 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
R3 = R23 R31 / (R12 + R23 + R31)
- And the star-to-delta conversion:
R12 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R3
R23 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R1
R31 = (R1 R2 + R2 R3 + R3 R1) / R2
- For equal resistances: delta R = 3 x star r (R = 3r), and star r = R/3.
- Battery A: 105 V, internal 0.25 ohm. Battery B: 100 V, internal 0.2 ohm. Battery C: 95 V, internal 0.25 ohm.
- Let the node voltages at the positive terminals be Va, Vb, Vc (common negative = 0).
- Current from A into the 0.5 ohm resistor: (105 - Va)/0.25 = (Va - Vb)/0.5.
105 - Va = 0.5(Va - Vb) -> 1.5 Va - 0.5 Vb = 105. (1)
- Current from C into the 0.3 ohm resistor: (95 - Vc)/0.25 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
95 - Vc = 0.8333(Vb - Vc) -> 5 Vb + Vc = 570. (2)
- At node B: (Va - Vb)/0.5 + (100 - Vb)/0.2 = (Vb - Vc)/0.3.
2(Va - Vb) + 5(100 - Vb) = 3.333(Vb - Vc)
2 Va - 10.333 Vb + 3.333 Vc = -500. (3)
- From (1): Va = 70 + 0.3333 Vb. From (2): Vc = 570 - 5 Vb.
- Substitute into (3): 2(70 + 0.3333 Vb) - 10.333 Vb + 3.333(570 - 5 Vb) = -500
140 + 0.6667 Vb - 10.333 Vb + 1900 - 16.667 Vb = -500
2040 - 26.333 Vb = -500 -> Vb = 2540/26.333 = 96.46 V.
- Va = 70 + 0.3333 x 96.46 = 70 + 32.15 = 102.15 V.
- Vc = 570 - 5 x 96.46 = 570 - 482.3 = 87.7 V.
- Current in 0.5 ohm resistor: I_AB = (Va - Vb)/0.5 = (102.15 - 96.46)/0.5 = 5.69/0.5 = 11.38 A (from A to B).
- Current in 0.3 ohm resistor: I_BC = (Vb - Vc)/0.3 = (96.46 - 87.7)/0.3 = 8.76/0.3 = 29.2 A (from B to C).
- Power in 0.5 ohm: P = I^2 R = 11.38^2 x 0.5 = 129.5 x 0.5 = 64.8 W.
- Power in 0.3 ohm: P = 29.2^2 x 0.3 = 852.6 x 0.3 = 255.8 W.
So the 0.5 ohm resistor carries 11.4 A (64.8 W) and the 0.3 ohm resistor carries 29.2 A (255.8 W).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 2x
What is a marine High Voltage System? Sketch and describe a Ship board high voltage switch board and its protective devices (16)
Appeared In: Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:
- AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
- DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
- Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.
Features of Marine HV System:
- Neutral is always earthed through a Neutral Earthing Resistor (NER) to limit earth fault current.
- HV systems are more expensive than LV systems due to the need for special insulation, protective gear, and safety features.
- They carry a higher arc-flash hazard, necessitating stringent operational and maintenance safety procedures.
- The general layout of an HV system is similar to an LV system, but includes additional protective and safety components.
Ships High Voltage Distribution System:
- 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
- High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
- HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
- High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
- High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
- High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
- Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
- Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.
Protective Devices in Marine HV Systems:
Protective Device | Function |
Overcurrent (Instantaneous) | Trips the breaker immediately on high current to protect equipment. |
OCIT (Overcurrent Inverse Time) | Shortens the trip delay as overcurrent magnitude increases. |
Earth Leakage | Detects small earth faults and trips the system to prevent damage or fire. |
Reverse Power Protection | Prevents motorization of generators by detecting reverse current flow. |
Undervoltage Protection | Trips equipment if the supply voltage drops below safe limits. |
Overtemperature Protection | Used to monitor cable and equipment temperatures to prevent overheating. |
Differential Fault Protection | Compares phase currents (inlet and outlet); trips if imbalance detected. |
Thermal Overload (Thermal O/L) | Trips on excessive current over time to protect insulation and windings. |
Locked Rotor Protection | Detects if a motor rotor is stalled by checking imbalance across phases. |
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 4x
Differentiate between half and full wave rectification. State where half wave rectification may be used and the purpose for which it is not well adapted. Sketch a bridge connection by which full wave rectification may be obtained (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Apr 2025 Jun 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The difference between half wave and full wave rectification:
Half-wave rectification:
- Uses a single diode to allow only one-half of the AC waveform (either the positive or negative half-cycle) to pass through. The other half is blocked.
- Results in a pulsating DC output with a significant amount of ripple (variation in voltage). The average DC voltage is lower compared to the input AC voltage.
- Simpler to implement, requiring only one diode, but less efficient because it wastes half of the input power.
- The average output current is 0.318 times the peak input current. The RMS value is 0.5 times the peak input current.
Half-wave rectification is not well adopted because:
- Less Average current
- Less average RMS
- High pulsation output
- Lower voltage developed
- More ripple as compared to others
- Efficiency is less as compared to others.
Full-wave rectification:
- Uses either two diodes in a centre-tapped transformer configuration or four diodes in a bridge rectifier configuration to utilize both halves of the AC waveform.
- Produces a pulsating DC output with less ripple than half-wave rectification, resulting in a smoother DC output and a higher average DC voltage.
- More efficient as it uses both halves of the input AC waveform.
- Requires more components (two or four diodes), but provides a more efficient and improved DC output. The average output current is 0.6365 times the peak input current, and the RMS value is 0.707 times the peak input current.
Sketch of bridge connection for full wave rectification:
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a simple sketch the arrangement of the three phase winding of an alternator showing the neutral point. (8)
(b) Explain why for most ships the neutral point is insulated. (4)
(c) Explain why in some installation the neutral point is Earthed. (4)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Aug 2025 Apr 2025 Nov 2025 Feb 2021 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
To form a star connection, one end of each phase winding is joined together to create a neutral point. The other ends of the windings are connected to outgoing conductors leading to the bus bar. This neutral point can either be insulated or connected to a neutral line, depending on the system design.
On ships, the neutral point is usually insulated to prevent the system from tripping in the event of a single earth fault. This is critical for maintaining power continuity to essential equipment like the steering gear, navigation systems, and emergency lighting.
By insulating the neutral, the system can tolerate one earth fault without immediate interruption, allowing time to locate and rectify the fault while ensuring continuous power supply. Only if a second earth fault occurs, creating a short circuit, will the protection system trip. This arrangement allows the ship to maintain essential operations.
In systems where the neutral point is earthed, any earth fault in the system will immediately create a fault current, causing the circuit protection (e.g., breakers or fuses) to trip. This configuration is common in high-voltage systems to ensure that faults are quickly isolated, preventing damage to equipment and reducing the risk of electric shock or fire.
Earthed neutral systems also simplify fault detection and protection mechanisms, making them suitable for vessels with high-voltage installations where rapid fault isolation is a priority.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (10 Marks)
Power Electronics & Rectifiers 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances. (8)
(b) Draw the circuit of Half-wave rectifier and its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 Ω is to supply power to 1000 Ω load from 110 V (RMS) source. Caleulate (8)
(i) Peak load current
(ii) DC load current
(iii) AC load current
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Forward bias characteristics:
- The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
- A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
- After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.
Reverse bias characteristics:
- When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
- For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.
Breakdown characteristics:
- In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).
Dynamic Resistance (Rd):
- This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Static Resistance (Rs):
- This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:
(a) High starting current:
(b) Low starting torque.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (10 Marks)
Electrical Circuits & Calculations 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) What are the characteristics of PN junction diode? Point out its specifications. Also point out the significance of dynamic and static resistances.
(b) Draw the circuit of Half wave rectitarene its output waveform. A diode whose internal resistance is 20 52 is to supply power to 1000 S load from 110 V (RMS) source. Calculate (6)
(i) Peak load current
(ii) DC load current
(iii) AC load current
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jul 2022 Mar 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Forward bias characteristics:
- The diode conducts when the p-side is connected to the positive terminal and the n-side to the negative terminal.
- A noticeable current flow begins once the forward bias voltage reaches approximately 0.5V to 0.7V (depending on the material, silicon, or germanium).
- After this threshold, a small increase in voltage results in a large increase in current.
Reverse bias characteristics:
- When the p-side is connected to the negative terminal and the n-side to the positive terminal, the diode does not conduct (except for a small leakage current).
- For Zener diodes, conduction occurs in reverse bias after the breakdown voltage is reached.
Breakdown characteristics:
- In reverse bias, if the reverse voltage exceeds a specific value (breakdown voltage), the diode may allow a large current to flow, potentially damaging the diode (unless it is a Zener diode designed for this purpose).
Dynamic Resistance (Rd):
- This represents the diode's resistance to AC voltage. It's calculated as the change in AC voltage divided by the change in AC current. It varies depending on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
Static Resistance (Rs):
- This is the resistance to DC voltage. It's calculated as the DC voltage across the diode divided by the DC current through it. Similar to dynamic resistance, it also depends on the operating point on the diode's I-V curve.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (10 Marks)
Electric Machines (Motors & Generators) 🔥 Repeated 10x
The direct on line start of squirrel cage motor is used for most electrical drives on a.c. powered ships. Describe with sketches as necessary one method of overcoming each of the following problems:
(a) High starting current
(b) Low starting torque.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Apr 2024 Dec 2023 Jan 2020 Mar 2019 Oct 2018 Jun 2018 Apr 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Overcoming High Starting Current:
(i) Star-Delta Starting:
- The stator windings have end connections brought out to a starter box with six terminals.
- These are first connected in a star configuration for starting, which reduces the voltage and hence the current.
- Once the rotor comes up to speed, the windings are automatically reconfigured to delta using a timer circuit.
- Interlocks are provided to prevent both star and delta contacts from closing together, ensuring safe switching.
(ii) Auto-Transformer Starting:
- An autotransformer with tapping points is used to provide reduced voltage during starting.
- Initially, reduced voltage is supplied to the motor through the autotransformer, which lowers the starting current.
- As the rotor picks up speed, the voltage is gradually increased using higher tapping points.
- Once full voltage is reached, the mains supply is directly connected to the motor, and the autotransformer is isolated.
(b) Overcoming Low Starting Torque:
(i) Wound Rotor Motor:
- The rotor has three windings connected at one end and brought out through slip rings.
- External variable resistances are connected through brushes and slip rings.
- At starting, current passes through these resistances, producing high starting torque.
- As speed increases, the resistance is reduced and eventually short-circuited by a common connection.
(ii) Double Cage Rotor:
- The rotor is designed with two sets of bars:
- Outer cage: small cross-section, high resistance.
- Inner cage: large cross-section, low resistance.
- At startup, most current flows in the high-resistance outer cage, developing high starting torque.
- As the speed increases, the slip decreases, the inner cage reactance reduces, and it takes over torque production efficiently.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (10 Marks)
Batteries & Emergency Power 🔥 Repeated 2x
Sketch and describe an arrangement for automatic connection of emergency batteries upon loss of main power. Include in your answer:
(a) Means of obtaining d.c. charging supply from a.c. mains:
(b) A method of maintaining charge on lead acid batteries;
(c) The arrangement to check that batteries operate at loss of main power
(d) The length of time for which emergency batteries of passenger and cargo ships must provide power.
Appeared In: Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The DC charging supply is obtained from the main busbar. A transformer will step down the voltage to required charging voltage and a rectifier will provide DC voltage at required charging emf
- When charging from a discharged state, emf is supplied through a branch ‘A’ at full charging voltage
- A voltage monitor ‘V’ monitor the voltage of the cell and gets energised when cell its full charge emf of 2.2V/cell.
- ‘V’ closes contact V1 and energises contact ‘TC’, then TC 1 gets open and TC2 gets closed and current passes through a resistor for trickle charging.
- When main power failure occurs, the contactor KM gets de-energised, so contacts KM1 & KM2 get open and KM3 & KM4 are closed.
- Opening of KM1 & KM2 isolates the battery from charging circuit and KM3 and KM4 closes to allow the battery to supply to emergency services
- A test switch provides means for testing the battery.
from the mainline through a bridge rectifier, which converts AC to DC.
- Full charge/ Quick charge/ burst charge: when the battery is discharged on load or otherwise full charge switch is switched ON to charge the battery
- Trickle charge/ float charge: batteries get discharged when not in use due to local actions so it is kept on trickle charge where very small amounts of current is supplied just to make up for the loss of charge.
test switch is pressed which simulates loss of main power and the charging contacts open and load contacts is made
for transitional power source 30 minutes for both passenger and cargo ship
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (10 Marks)
Electrical Safety & Protection 🔥 Repeated 4x
Discuss the criteria of the classification of marine high voltage for A.C. and D.C. Systems. Sketch a Ships high voltage distribution system and explain its features. Discuss the various methods of testing the insulation of HV system.Mention the significance of PI Test, why ssing ine instillion testers are user in HV insulation measurements?
Appeared In: Jun 2025 Mar 2025 Jun 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Marine high voltage systems are classified based on voltage levels:
- AC Systems: High voltage is classified as any voltage above 1000 volts (1 kV).
- DC Systems: High voltage classification starts at 1500 volts (1.5 kV).
- Typical marine high-voltage systems operate at standard levels such as 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV, and 11 kV.
Ships High Voltage Distribution System:
- 6.6 kV Generator Sets: These generate the high voltage power.
- High Voltage Switchboards: These contain switchgear, protection devices, and instrumentation for controlling and monitoring the HV system.
- HV Cables: These carry high-voltage power throughout the ship.
- High to Low Voltage Step-Down Transformers: These reduce the high voltage to lower voltages suitable for various loads.
- High to High Voltage Step-Down Transformers (e.g., 6.6 kV to 2.9 kV): These may be used to step down voltage between different parts of the system.
- High Voltage Motors: These are used for propulsion and other high-power applications.
- Harmonic Filters: These mitigate harmonic distortion in the system.
- Earthed Neutral (NER): This provides a safety ground for the system.
Methods of Testing HV Insulation
Megger Testing:
- This involves applying a high DC voltage (e.g., 5000 V DC for a 6.6 kV system) using a megger to measure insulation resistance. A minimum insulation resistance is specified (e.g., (kV + 10) MΩ; for 6.6 kV, this would be at least 7.6 MΩ). This test checks for insulation degradation.
Polarization Index (PI) Test:
- This test is performed when low insulation resistance is detected. It measures the ratio of insulation resistance after 10 minutes of applying voltage to the resistance after 1 minute. A PI value greater than 1.1 generally indicates that the insulation is absorbing moisture, and may be improved by further heating (for example, with an infrared lamp to dry the windings). A PI of 1 shows damaged winding insulation requiring rewinding.
- The Polarization Index (PI) Test is particularly significant as it helps in detecting moisture presence, assessing insulation aging, and informing maintenance decisions. Low PI values can indicate moisture presence, while higher values suggest better insulation quality.
3-Terminal Insulation Testers:
- These testers offer improved safety. One terminal is firmly grounded. Any leakage current flows through the earth connection, preventing electric shock to the user during testing.
Advantages of 3-Terminal Insulation Testers:
- Increased safety for operators, especially in high-voltage systems.
- Ensures reliable insulation resistance measurements even in adverse conditions.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model